2005 Saturn RELAY Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
{CAUTION:
Manual Seats
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Use the lever located on
the front of the seat to
adjust the seat forward or
rearward. Pull up the
lever to unlock the seat.
Slide the seat to where you
want it and release the
lever.
To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move
the seat back and forth with your body.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Six-Way Power Seats
Heated Seats
Your vehicle may have this feature. If it does, the
heated seat buttons are located on the climate control
panel.
Your vehicle may have this
feature. If it does, the
six-way power seat control
is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s
This feature will heat the lower cushions of the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats.
seat. Your vehicle may
also have a passenger’s
six-way power seat.
Press this button once to
turn on the driver’s side
heated seat to the
high setting.
• Move the front of the control up or down to adjust
the front portion of the cushion up or down.
• Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust
the rear portion of the cushion up or down.
• Lift up or push down on the whole control to move
the entire seat up or down.
Both indicator lights to the right of the symbol will be lit
to indicate that it is on the high setting. Press the
button a second time to go to the low setting.
One indicator will be lit. Press the button a third time to
turn the heated seat off.
• To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide
the control forward or rearward.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press this button once to
turn on the front
Reclining Seatbacks
passenger’s heated seat to
the high setting.
Both indicator lights to the left of the symbol will be lit to
indicate that it is on the high setting. Press the button
a second time to go to the low setting. One indicator will
be lit. Press the button a third time to turn the heated
seat off.
To adjust a seatback, pull up on the lever located on
the outboard side of the driver’s or front passenger’s
seats. Release the lever to lock the seatback where you
want it. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into position. Pull up on the lever, and the seat
will go to its original upright position.
The heated seats will turn off when the ignition is
turned to LOCK and will resume operation when the
ignition is turned to RUN, unless the button is manually
turned off.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps
used to adjust, remove, and reinstall the seats. By using
the levers and straps in the correct order, you can
easily remove the seats from the vehicle.
When reinstalling the seats, make sure the seats are in
the proper positions.
If your vehicle has a second row center console, it can
page 2-52. Do not put a seat in the center position
because the safety belt cannot be worn properly in this
position. See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
on page 1-22.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The head restraints are adjustable on the first and
second row seats. They are not adjustable on the third
row seat, if equipped. To adjust a head restraint,
slide it up or down.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Release the rear set of
hooks from the floor
pins by pulling the
nylon strap located at
the base of the
Flip and Fold Feature (Bucket Seats)
The rear seats in your vehicle can be folded forward.
Use this feature for exiting and entering third row seats.
1. Ensure the adjustable head restraints are
fully down.
seat. Hang on to the
strap to guide the seat
forward.
2. Fold the seatback flat
on the seat, by either
pulling on the nylon
strap on the rear of the
seat or lifting up on
the lever located on the
front of the seatback.
If the seat adjusts, slide
it all the way back.
To return the seat(s) to the normal position, do the
following:
1. Push the seat back and firmly push the rear hooks
onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the
rear of the seat.
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
3. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
strap on the back of the seat and raise the
seatback until it locks upright.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The other lever is
located on the rear
of the bucket seat.
Bucket Seats
If your vehicle has the bucket seats, the seatbacks can
be folded down or reclined. The seats can also be
adjusted forward or rearward, or removed.
Adjusting the Bucket Seats
There are two adjustment levers on each seat to adjust
the seat forward or rearward.
Lift up either lever and slide the seat forward or
rearward.
Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to make
sure it is locked into place.
One is located below the center, in front of the
bucket seats.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Nylon Strap
Recliner Lever
The seatback on a bucket seat can be either folded
forward or reclined. The following explains how to use
either the nylon strap or the lever to fold or recline
the seatback.
To fold the seatback forward, pull the nylon strap
located on the rear of the seat or lift up on the recliner
lever located on the front of the seatback. The
seatback will lock into place.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the
recliner lever while raising the seatback until it locks
upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked into place.
To recline the seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the
recliner lever. Press back on the seatback until you
reach the desired position, then let go of the strap or
lever.
To return the seatback to an upright position, pull on the
nylon strap or lift the recliner lever without putting any
pressure on the seatback. Push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
Removing the Bucket Seats
3. From behind the seat, pull the nylon strap, located
at the base of the seat, to release the rear latches
from the floor pins.
Make sure the seatback is in the upright position. The
head restraints should be fully down.
1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
strap on the back of the seat to fold the seatback
forward.
2. Slide the seat all the way back by lifting either one
of the adjuster levers and sliding the seat fully
rearward.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can also lift the lever on the side of the seat to
release the rear latches from the floor pins.
4. To unlatch the front latches, with the seat folded
forward, squeeze the angled bar toward the
straight crossbar.
Do not let go of the strap or lever until the seat is
folded all the way forward.
5. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward, then
toward the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it
out. This should be done in one motion.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Bucket Seats
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Do not put the seats in so they face rearward because
they will not latch that way. If you want more storage
room behind the seat, adjust the seat by sliding it
forward.
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure the seats are in the full rear position before
beginning this procedure.
1. With the seat folded, squeeze the angled bar
toward the straight crossbar while placing the
front hooks of the bucket seat onto the front two
floor pins.
2. Make sure the bucket
seat is angled so that
the front hooks
clear the floor pins.
3. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins
by pushing down the rear of the seat.
4. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
If the front hooks are not attached correctly, the
rear hooks will not attach to the rear set of
floor pins.
5. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
strap on the back of the seat and raise the
seatback until it locks upright.
If the front hooks are not attaching correctly, check
that the seat is in the full rear position.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
is locked in place.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks
Captain Chairs
If your vehicle has captain’s chairs, the chairs and
seatbacks can be adjusted forward or rearward.
{CAUTION:
Adjusting the Captain’s Chairs
(Second Row)
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
The second row captain’s chairs can be adjusted
forward or rearward.
There are two manual adjustment bars on each seat.
One is located under the front of the seat cushion. The
other one is located under the rear of the seat cushion.
Lift up either bar to slide the seat forward or rearward.
Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to
make sure it is locked into place.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Captain’s Chairs
To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever,
located on the outboard side of the seat. Use the recliner
lever to move the seatback to the desired position.
1. Pull the nylon strap behind the seat to release the
rear hooks from the floor pins.
It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you
lean forward, taking the weight off the seatback.
Lift up on the recliner lever and fold the seatback
forward. The seatback will lock into place when you
push it back to the upright position.
The armrests can be lowered or raised for entering or
exiting the vehicle.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Captain’s Chairs
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins
and removed from the vehicle.
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
Do not put the seats in so they face rearward because
they will not latch that way. For the second row, if
you want more storage room behind the seat, adjust the
seat by sliding it forward.
1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins.
Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright position, the
seat belts are on the correct side of the seats and
the seats are in the full rear position before beginning
this procedure.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Third Row Seat
Your vehicle may have a third row seat. It is a full
bench seat and may come with hideaway rear storage
for more information. The third row seat can be removed
and replaced, or with the seatback folded, it will lie
flat with the hideaway rear storage bins.
Folding the Seatback(s)
To fold down either side of
the 50/50 split bench seat,
pull up on the lever
located on the back of the
seat you want to fold,
and push the seatback
down until it is locked
into place.
2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear
latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is properly
attached.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is
locked into place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Returning the Seatback to an Upright
Position
Removing the Third Row Seat
1. Remove the hideaway rear storage bins, if
equipped. See Hideaway Rear Storage Bins
on page 2-54 for more information.
{CAUTION:
2. Make sure all items are off the seat.
3. Put the seatback in its folded position before
removing the seat. See “Folding the Seatback”
previously.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
1. Move the second row seat completely forward by
using the manual adjustment bar under either the
front or rear of the seat cushion.
2. From the passenger’s or driver’s side sliding door,
pull up on the lever to release the seatback, then
push up on the seatback to raise the seat.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it
is locked into the upright position.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing the Third Row Seat
{CAUTION:
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
{CAUTION:
4. From behind the seat, squeeze the release handle
until the pin indicators are fully out. This indicates
that the rear latches are released from the floor. For
ease of removing the seat, squeeze the handle
with the palm of your hand up.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
5. Lift the seat slightly from the floor to ensure the
latches are clear of the floor pins.
6. Pull the seat rearward and out of the vehicle. The
release handle can be used to carry the seat.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not put the third row seat in so it faces rearward
because it will not latch that way. The seat has to go in
before the hideaway rear storage bins. See Hideaway
3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is locked
down. The indicator pins will no longer stick out
when the seat is properly latched into place.
For ease of installing the seat, put the seat in the folded
position before beginning this procedure.
{CAUTION:
1. From the rear of the vehicle, place the front hooks
of the seat onto the front floor pins in the third row.
To do this, the seat will need to be angled
approximately 8-10 inches (20–25 cm) from the
floor so the front hooks clear the rear floor pins and
rear floor cups. Use the release handle to guide
the seat into place.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
If the front hooks are not attached correctly, the
rear latches will not attach to the rear set of
floor pins.
4. Return the seatback to its upright position. See
“Returning the Seatback to an Upright Position”
earlier in this section.
2. Firmly push the rear latches into the rear floor pins
by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be
sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on your shoulder. The belt should be
away from your face and neck, but not falling off your
shoulder.
To move it down, push
down on the button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move the
height adjuster up by
pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pushing the button down
to make sure it has locked into position.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one
thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all
the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear safety belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There may be one guide for each second row position.
If your vehicle has a third row, there is one guide for
each outboard position. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide into the storage pocket.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your retailer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
If the child is sitting in a center rear seat position,
move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In
either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still
is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the
child’s upper body would have the restraint
that belts provide. If the child is sitting in a
second row position or a third row outboard position
(if equipped), see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This
is necessary because a newborn infant’s neck
is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
Q: When securing an aftermarket child seat in a
bucket seat, I am unable to get the seat
fastened in snugly enough. What should I do?
A: With some child seats, it may be difficult to tighten
the vehicle belts so that there is less side-to-side or
front-to-back movement of the child seat. A
replacement buckle, which makes it easier to
secure your child seat, is available from your retailer
at no charge to you.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You
may find these instructions on the restraint itself or
in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the
belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to
be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come
with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself
or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The
child restraint instructions are important, so if they
are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
{CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Top Strap
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. General Motors recommends that
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position or at the third row passenger’s-side
position if a national or local law requires that the top
strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored. There is no place to anchor the top strap in
these positions.
If the position you are using has an adjustable head
restraint, route the top strap under it. See Head
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Third Row
A. Top Strap Anchor
B. Seatback Release Latch
Second Row
In the third row (if equipped), there is a top strap anchor
for the driver’s-side position or for the center position.
The anchor is located on the back of the seat near
the center of the seatback. The anchor can
accommodate one top strap.
In the second row, there is a top strap anchor for each
seating position. The anchors are located at the rear
base of the seat.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. There are anchors
in each seating position in the second row.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
{CAUTION:
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors for this
child restraint system,
each seating position with
the LATCH system has
a label on the seatback.
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
The labels are located at each lower anchor position,
near the base of each second row seating position.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-53 if the child restraint has a top strap or
top tether.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
For vehicles with a third row, there is no top strap
anchor in the passenger’s-side position. Do not secure
a child seat in this position if a national or local law
requires that the top strap be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top strap must be anchored.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is designed to
turn off the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a small
child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat is
for more information on this including important
safety information.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
{CAUTION:
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
There is no top strap anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position if a
national or local law requires that the top strap be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. See
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbags.
General Motors recommends that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if the
airbag or airbags are off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags, the
off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition
to RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. You should not be
able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If the airbag or airbags are off, the off indicator on
the instrument panel will be lit and stay lit when the
key is turned to RUN or START.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG will
appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your retailer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have side impact airbags. Side impact
airbags are available for the driver and right front
passenger.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Side impact airbags for the driver and right
front passenger are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts but do not replace them.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or in many
side crashes. And, for some unrestrained
occupants, frontal airbags may provide less
protection in frontal crashes than more
forceful airbags have provided in the past.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate with
great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you
are too close to an inflating airbag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for airbag inflation before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s side
impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
{CAUTION:
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate only
if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account a
variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is
traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do
not put anything between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put anything on
the steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. Do not let seat covers block
the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a
level less than full deployment. Your vehicle is
equipped with electronic frontal sensors, which help the
sensing system distinguish between a moderate
frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If
the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph
(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 25 mph (29 to 40.2 km/h).
(The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.)
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds. For
example:
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag.
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not likely help the
occupant. A side impact airbag will only deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at a
different crash speed than if the object does not
deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are
not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not likely help the occupants.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the airbag. The inflator, the airbag and related hardware
are all part of the airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules
are located inside the steering wheel and instrument
panel. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the airbag
modules are located in the seatback closest to the
driver’s and/or right front passenger’s door.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for vehicles with a driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact airbag.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. For vehicles with side impact airbags, the side of
the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right front
passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag that
come into contact with you may be warm, but not
too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the airbag
covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s
seatback, the airbag may not work properly. You
may have to replace the airbag module in the
steering wheel, both the airbag module and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
airbag, or both the airbag module and seatback for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s side
impact airbag. Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
retailer for service.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions. The driver’s
airbag or airbags are not part of the passenger sensing
system.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system. The
passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument
panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key to
RUN or START. The words ON and OFF or the symbol
for on and off, will be visible during the system check.
When the system check is complete, either the word ON
or the word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol
for off will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger’s seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of
a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
passenger’s airbag or airbags should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags if:
{CAUTION:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
(if equipped) under certain conditions, no
system is fail-safe, and no one can guarantee
that an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is turned
off. General Motors recommends that
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s airbag or airbags, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags
are off.
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag or airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag or airbags
are active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
airbag or airbags, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle
who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position for
about two minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and then enable the passenger’s
airbag or airbags.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s airbag or airbags
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
CAUTION: (Continued)
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 7-9.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the instrument panel can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Storage Areas ................................................2-49
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
This vehicle has a double sided key for the ignition and
the driver’s door lock.
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theft
system. The key has a transponder in the key head that
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase this key from your retailer. The key
will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag
that came with the original keys. Give this tag to your
retailer if you need a new key made.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmed
page 2-28 for more information on programming your
new key.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, see
information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
Remote Keyless Entry System
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-5.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If you are still having trouble, see your retailer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has this
feature, you can start the engine from outside the
vehicle. See “Remote Vehicle Start” at the end of this
section for more detailed information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock the vehicle’s doors and the
liftgate using the remote keyless entry transmitter
supplied with your vehicle.
Q (Lock): To lock all doors and the liftgate, press the
lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
the power door lock features. If your vehicle has the
content theft-deterrent system, the remote keyless entry
transmitter’s lock button may arm the system. See
The remote keyless entry
transmitter shown here is
for a vehicle equipped
with the remote vehicle
start feature and dual
power sliding doors.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, the turn signal lamps may flash to
let you know the command has been received. If
you press the lock button again, within five seconds, the
horn will sound and the turn signal lamps may flash
to let you know the vehicle is already locked. See “FOB
LOCK FEEDBACK” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
The remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your
vehicle will only contain the buttons specific to your
vehicle’s factory installed remote system features.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
" (Unlock): When you press unlock on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s door
will unlock. If you press unlock again within five seconds,
all the doors and the liftgate will unlock. If you would
like all the doors to unlock the first time you press
unlock, see “FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS” under DIC
*+ (Dual Power Sliding Doors): If your vehicle
has dual power sliding doors, your remote keyless entry
transmitter will have two buttons that have a van symbol
on them. The van symbol on the left is for the driver’s side
sliding door and the van symbol on the right is for the
passenger’s side sliding door. Press and hold the
passenger’s or driver’s side button, with the van symbol
on it, to open or close the selected power sliding door.
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will disarm the system. See Content
You can operate the power sliding door(s) with the
remote keyless entry transmitter even if the power
sliding door override switch(es), on the overhead
console, are active or inactive. See Power Sliding
When you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicle the turn signal lamps will flash to
let you know the command was received.
If the sliding door is closed and the power sliding door
button on the transmitter is pressed and held, the
vehicle’s doors will unlock and then the power sliding
door will open. If the power sliding door has been locked
using the manual door lock lever, you will need to
unlock the power sliding door before it can be opened
with the keyless entry transmitter sliding door button.
L (Remote Alarm): When you press the horn button
on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the turn
signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound. This will
allow you to attract attention, if needed.
Press this button again to stop the alarm from sounding.
If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened, the driver’s side
power sliding door will not open completely. Do not try to
force the door. Once the fuel filler door is closed, the
driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally.
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation
+ (Power Sliding Door): If your vehicle has one
power sliding door, the remote keyless entry transmitter
will have a button with a van symbol on it. Press and hold
this button to open or close the power sliding door. See
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Insert a flat object, such as a coin, into the slot on
the side of the transmitter and twist it to separate
the halves.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your retailer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your retailer. When the retailer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your retailer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of four
transmitters matched to it.
See your retailer to match transmitters to another
vehicle.
Battery Replacement
2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not
use the metal flanges to pop out the battery.
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about three years.
3. Replace the battery.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves
are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.
5. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
for seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To start the engine using the remote start feature, do the
following:
Remote Vehicle Start
This feature allows you to start the engine from outside
the vehicle. It may also turn the rear window defogger
if the outside temperature is below 45°F (7°C).
1. Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter, if
equipped with the remote vehicle start button,
at the vehicle.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view
when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button,
then immediately press and hold the remote
vehicle start button until the vehicle’s turn signal
lamps flash, or for at least two seconds, if the
vehicle’s lights are not visible. The vehicle’s doors
will be locked.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has the
remote vehicle start feature, the remote keyless entry
transmitter will have a button with this symbol on it.
3. When the vehicle’s engine starts, the parking lamps
will turn on and remain on while the engine is
running.
An increased range of operation is provided with the
remote keyless entry transmitter that has the remote
vehicle start button.
After a remote start, the engine will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done or the vehicle’s key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to RUN.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
The maximum number of remote starts or remote start
attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two.
If it is the vehicle’s first remote start, and the engine is
still running, repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a 10 minute time
extension. Ten minutes will be added to the remaining
minutes of the first remote start. The 10 minute time
extension is considered a second remote start.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
After two remote starts have been provided, the
vehicle’s ignition switch must be turned to RUN and
then back to LOCK using the key before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if:
• The remote start system is disabled. See “REMOTE
START” under DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel
If you enter the vehicle after a remote start, and the
engine is running, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the RUN position to drive the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.
• The vehicle’s hood, liftgate or doors are not closed.
• The hazard warning flashers are on.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
To manually shut off the engine after a remote start, do
any of the following:
• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitter at the
vehicle and press the remote start button until
the parking lamps turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Two remote vehicle starts have already been
provided. The maximum number of remote starts or
remote start attempts between ignition cycles
with the key is two.
• Insert the vehicle’s key into the ignition switch and
turn the switch to RUN and then back to LOCK.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Door Locks
To unlock the driver’s door from the outside with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of
the vehicle. To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with your key, insert the key and turn it toward the rear
of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
If your vehicle has power door locks, you may be able
to unlock all of the doors and the liftgate when you insert
the key, turn it toward the front of the vehicle, and
hold it there for one second. You may be able to lock all
of the doors when you insert the key and turn it toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
From the inside, press the
top of the power door lock
switch, located on either
front door, to unlock
all doors and the liftgate.
From the inside, use the manual or power door locks.
With the content theft-deterrent system, the power door
lock switch will not unlock the doors until the system
for more details.
To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back on
the manual lever. To lock either front door from the
inside, push the manual lever forward.
You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside
by pressing the bottom of the power lock switch on
either front door. With the content theft-deterrent system,
the power door lock switch may cause the system to
more details.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the liftgate has been unlocked with the power door
locks, you will not need the key to open it. Squeeze the
handle located above the license plate to open the
liftgate. This is also true if you use the remote keyless
page 2-4.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating any
of the above actions more than one time.
If a door remains open, without any other door being
opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after
approximately 45 seconds.
If the key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock
the doors.
Delayed Locking
To turn the delayed locking feature off or on, see DIC
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all doors have been closed for
approximately five seconds.
Sliding Door Delayed Locking
To activate the delayed locking feature, do one of the
following:
If either sliding door is open when you use the power
door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door that
is open will not lock. Normally the delayed locking
feature will be used to lock the sliding door after it has
been closed.
• Press the driver’s door power lock switch one time
while the driver’s door is open.
• Press the passenger’s door power lock switch one
time while the passenger’s door is open.
The sliding door delayed locking feature will lock your
sliding door(s) in situations where the delayed
locking feature does not apply or was overridden or
programmed to be off. See “Delayed Locking” earlier in
this section. Shortly after the last sliding door is
closed, all the doors will lock.
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter one time while any door is open.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking is
active.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Door Locks
Lockout Protection
All of the doors will lock automatically when you move
the shift lever out of PARK (P). This feature cannot
be disabled.
The lockout protection feature makes it more difficult to
lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’s door is
open while the key is in the ignition, the door cannot be
locked with the power door lock switch.
If someone needs to get out of the vehicle while it is not
in PARK (P), shift into PARK (P), or, have that person
use the manual lever or the power door lock switch.
When the door is closed again, it will lock when
the vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
This feature cannot guarantee that you will never be
locked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in
the ignition, or, if the manual door lock is used, the key
could still be locked inside the vehicle. Always
remember to take the key with you.
With automatic door locks, you can lock or unlock the
doors at any time, either manually or by using the power
door lock switches.
Dual Sliding Doors
To open either sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull
the handle out and then pull the door toward the rear.
If you slide the door all the way back, the door will rest in
a detent position.
Programmable Automatic Door
Unlock
Your vehicle was programmed so that all doors will
unlock automatically when the shift lever is moved into
PARK (P).
To move the door forward, you must first pull the door
past the open detent position.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a
little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, do
not try to force the sliding door. Just close the driver’s
side sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is
closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened
normally.
To change the way the automatic door unlocking
operates, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sliding Door Lock
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door does
not slam shut be sure to hold it open until
everyone is clear of the door, and only then
allow it to slowly close.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sliding Door Security Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with sliding door security locks
that helps prevent young children or other passengers
from opening the sliding door(s) using the inside
door handle. To use one of these locks, do the following:
1. Open the sliding door.
2. On the inside of the
sliding door(s), on the
front edge of the
door will be a lock.
Push the lever
up to engage the lock.
Lock either sliding door from inside the vehicle by
moving the manual lever down. Unlock it by moving the
lever up.
With the power door locks, the sliding door lock has a
page 3-64.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has power sliding door(s), you can
prevent power opening of the sliding door from the
passenger power sliding door (psd) activation switch by
pressing the psd second row passenger override
(deactivation) switch located on the overhead console.
Power Sliding Door (PSD)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can open and close
the power sliding door(s) using the switches inside
your vehicle. You can also operate the sliding door(s)
with your remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
If you want to open the sliding door while the security
lock is on, unlock and open the door from the outside.
You should let adults and older children know how
the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock. If
you do not, adults or older children who ride in the rear
will not be able to open the sliding door from the
inside while the security lock feature is in use.
{CAUTION:
Leaving your children or pets unattended in
your vehicle can be dangerous. They could
operate the power sliding door. A child or
others could be injured. Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
Canceling the Sliding Door
Security Lock
1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from the
outside.
2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
The sliding door lock will now work normally.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has dual
power sliding doors, you
have these switches.
Power Sliding Door (PSD) Switches
Your vehicle will have one of the following switch(es)
located on the overhead console switchbank.
If your vehicle has a single
power sliding door (PSD),
you have this switch.
Driver’s Side and
Passenger’s Side PSD
Switches
Your vehicle also has
passenger power sliding
door activation switch(es).
If you have a single
PSD Activation/Override
(Deactivation) Switch
PSD, this switch is located
in front of the passenger
side sliding door. If
your vehicle has dual
PSDs, the switches are
located in front of
both sliding doors.
Passenger PSD
Activation Switch
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Sliding Door Operation
• To manually close the power sliding door(s) while
the switches are in the activation position, pull the
inside or outside door handle or the edge of
the door. Move the door about 4 inches (10 cm)
toward the closed position and release it. The door
will close completely and latch.
The power sliding door(s) will only open if the transaxle
is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to be in
PARK (P) to close the door(s).
There are several ways to open and close the power
sliding door(s).
If a power sliding door is locked, it cannot be unlocked
and opened using the overhead console PSD
switch(es) or the passenger PSD activation switch(es).
The power sliding door must either be manually
unlocked or unlocked using the power door unlock
switch located on the driver’s or front passenger’s
armrest, and then opened using the overhead or
passenger PSD activation switch(es).
• If your vehicle has a single power sliding door,
press the top of the overhead console PSD
activation/override (deactivation) switch.
• If your vehicle has dual power sliding doors, press
the top of the driver’s side and/or passenger’s side
overhead console PSD switch.
• Press the passenger PSD activation switch. This
switch will also stop a moving door immediately.
The remote keyless entry transmitter can also be used
to open the power sliding door(s). If the vehicle is
locked, press the power sliding door button(s) and all
doors will unlock and the sliding door(s) will open.
page 2-5.
• Press the power sliding door button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
• To manually open the power sliding door(s) while
the switch(es) are in the activation position, pull
and release the inside or outside door handle
to release the door latch. The door will fully open.
If the power sliding door has been manually locked, you
must unlock the PSD before it can be opened.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the power sliding door on
when you go through an automatic car wash, the
door may accidentally open. Be sure the power
sliding door is turned off when going through a
car wash.
If the power sliding door(s) is open or in the process of
closing when you shift out of PARK (P), a chime will
sound. This is a warning that the sliding door(s) is not
completely closed. Also, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will indicate if the door is open. See DIC
and close the door.
{CAUTION:
If an object obstructs the power sliding door(s) while it is
closing, the door will automatically reverse to the
open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
Resistance must be as strong as the force of the closing
door, or stronger. The force of the closing door
increases significantly as the door approaches the
latched position.
If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) and
accelerate before the power sliding door
latches closed, the door may reverse to the
open position. A child or others could fall out
of the vehicle and be injured. Always make
sure the power sliding door is closed and
latched before you drive away.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a
little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, do
not try to force the sliding door. When the fuel filler door
is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can be opened
normally.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the sliding door. Make sure the door
path is clear before closing the door.
If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door does
not slam shut, turn on the power sliding door
feature. Then if the door closes, it will close
under the control of the power door system.
Power Sliding Door Second Row
Passenger Override (Deactivation)
To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door(s)
by using the passenger PSD activation switch, press
the override (deactivation) part of the overhead console
switch. The door can still be manually opened from
the inside or outside with the override (deactivation) on.
To open a power sliding door(s) manually when the
overhead console switch is in override (deactivation)
position, pull the inside or outside door handle and slide
the door all the way back.
To close the door(s) manually when the override
switch(es) is in the override (deactivation) position, pull
the inside or outside door handle and slide the door
all the way forward to the latched position.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop the door(s) immediately while the door(s) is
opening or closing, press the PSD override
(deactivation) part of the switch.
3. If the power sliding door overhead console switch is
in the override (deactivation) position, return to the
activation position.
4. Open the sliding door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, overhead console switch, or passenger
switch. Allow the door to travel fully open.
Pressing the PSD button(s) on the remote keyless entry
will open and close the door unless the door has
been manually locked using the mechanical slider.
If the door does not travel to the fully open position,
press the overhead console switch to the override
(deactivation) position and slide the door fully open and
closed. Check for foreign objects in the tracks. Repeat
the procedure starting with Step 1. If the door resists
travel to the fully open position, see your dealer
for service.
Resetting the Power Sliding Door
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not at
all because of the following conditions:
• A low voltage or dead battery
• A disconnected battery
• If the instrument panel PSD/fuse 21, LHPSD/fuse
24 or RHPSD/fuse 25 are removed or blown.
Liftgate
information about your fuse panel.
To unlock or lock the liftgate from the outside, use the
remote keyless entry transmitter. For more information,
page 2-5. You can also use the power door lock switch
to lock and unlock the liftgate.
If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door
may need to be reset. If your vehicle has the dual
power sliding doors, both doors will have to be reset. To
reset a door, do the following:
Open the liftgate using the handle located above the
license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise
by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come
on, illuminating the rear cargo area.
1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked
and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for
overhead obstructions such as a garage door,
you could break the liftgate glass. Always check to
make sure the area above the liftgate is clear
before opening it.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Do not drive with the liftgate even
slightly open.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
Manual Rear Quarter Windows
Your vehicle may have manual rear quarter windows.
The switches on the
driver’s door armrest
control the front windows
when the ignition is in
RUN, ACCESSORY
or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained
on page 2-31.
To open, pull the latch
forward to release it, then
swing the window
outward. Press the center
of the latch to secure
the window in the open
position.
The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. The first position lowers the window normally.
To close, pull the center of the latch forward and then
close the latch. Press the center of the latch to
secure the window in the closed position.
To raise the window, pull up the front of the switch.
Express-Down Window
To activate the express-down feature, push the AUTO
switch all the way down to the second position, then
release it. The window will lower completely. To stop the
window from lowering all the way, pull up on the front
of the switch.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Rear Quarter Windows
Sun Visors
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter windows.
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. You
can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
This switch, located in the
overhead console
switchbank, is used for
opening and closing
the power rear quarter
windows.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a visor vanity mirror. Pull down
the sun visor to access the vanity mirror.
Lighted Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle may have a lighted vanity mirror. Pull down
the sun visor and flip up the cover to expose the
vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you flip up
the cover.
Press the top of the switch to open the windows; both
windows will open. The windows will continue to open as
long as the switch is pressed, until they are fully
opened.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Press the bottom of the switch to close both windows.
The windows can be closed fully or partially, depending
on how long the switch is pressed.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY, or Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to use the
power rear quarter windows. See Retained Accessory
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your alarm system will arm when the key is removed
from the ignition and you use the driver’s power
door lock switch, with the driver’s door open or the
passenger’s door power door lock switch with the
passenger’s door open to lock the vehicle. If you would
like to turn on power door lock switch arming, see
page 3-64.
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm system.
When the security light flashes quickly the system is
arming. After all doors and the liftgate are closed
and locked, the security light will begin flashing at a
very slow rate to let you know the system is armed.
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm if the key is not in the
ignition and you use your remote keyless entry
A light located on top of your instrument panel, near the
center of the vehicle next to the windshield, will flash
slowly to let you know that the system has been armed.
transmitter to lock the doors. The security light will flash
to let you know the system is arming. If you press
the transmitter’s lock button twice withiin 5 seconds, the
horn will sound. After all doors and the liftgate are
closed and locked, the security light will begin flashing
at a very slow rate to let you know the system is armed.
While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power
door lock switch.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key, or turns the ignition to RUN. The
horn will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash for up
to two minutes.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming with Your Key
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to
lock the driver’s door. The security light will flash to
let you know the system is arming. After all doors and
the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light
will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the
system is armed. If you would like your key not to
arm the system, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
The security light will stop flashing to let you know the
system is no longer armed.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key
to unlock the driver’s door. The security light will
stop flashing to let you know the system is no longer
armed. If you would like your key not to disarm the alarm
system, see DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel
Arming Confirmation
If remote unlock confirmation is on, the turn signal
lamps will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm
system has disarmed. If you would not like the turn
signal lamps to flash, see DIC Vehicle Personalization
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III
PASS-Key® III Operation
Your PASS-Key® III system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key® III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III is a passive
theft deterrent system.
This means you do
not have to do anything
different to arm or disarm
the system. It works
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
when you insert or remove
the key from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When the PASS-Key® III system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine does not start and the security message
comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
To program the new key, do the following:
1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed key into the
ignition lock cylinder and start the engine. If the
engine will not start, see your retailer for service.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the instrument panel
PASS KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with
the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first key may be faulty. See your
retailer or a locksmith who can service the
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The security message will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
security message went on due to how quickly
the key is programmed.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoder to learn the
transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all
the currently programmed keys are lost or do not
operate, you must see your retailer or a locksmith who
can service PASS-Key® III to have keys made and
programmed to the system.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security message comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your retailer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key® III key, see your
retailer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III to
have a new key made.
See your retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III to get a new key blank that is cut exactly
as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
The key can be turned to one of four positions while in
the ignition switch.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, for
the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
A (LOCK): This is the only position from which you can
remove the key. This position locks your ignition and
transaxle.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which you can
operate the electrical accessories, such as the radio.
Starting the Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
C (RUN): This is the position to which the switch returns
after the engine is started and the ignition key is
released. This is the position for driving. Even while the
engine is not running, RUN can be used to operate
your electrical accessories and to display some
instrument panel warning lights.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the ignition key. The switch
will return to RUN for driving.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
With RAP, your power windows and the audio system
will continue to work for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off or until either door is opened. If a
door is opened, the power windows and audio system
will shut off.
2. If the engine does not start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way
down while you turn the key to START. Do this until
the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of
the key.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still will not start, or starts briefly but then stops
again, repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the
temperature. When the engine starts, release the
key and the accelerator pedal.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater. In
very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum
of four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At
temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have an
internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This will
prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when
the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on
the cord.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your Saturn retailer. If you do not,
your engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
electrical cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
PARK (P): This gear position locks the front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start the engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. Fully apply the regular brakes
before shifting from PARK (P) when the ignition key
is in RUN. A click from a solenoid may be heard,
indicating that the shift lock control system is operating
properly.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your Saturn retailer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The Saturn retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever — push the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the desired gear. See
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
on page 4-30.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the vehicle when it
is already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also,
use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
page 2-38. If you are pulling a trailer, see
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
Warm-Up Shift
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle
designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside
temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice
that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until
the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition
designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment
and defrost the windows more quickly. See Climate
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and
you are:
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive your vehicle that way, you
could damage the transaxle. Have your vehicle
serviced right away. You can drive in SECOND (2)
when you are driving less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) for higher speeds
until then.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears
• When going down a steep hill
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control the vehicles
speed while going down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transaxle. Also, shifting into
SECOND (2) at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can
cause damage. Drive in THIRD (3) or AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D) instead of SECOND (2).
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive, your engine’s driving
power is sent to all four wheels for extra traction
when needed.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far that way, your
vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
have your vehicle serviced right away. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving less
than 35 mph (55 km/h) and THIRD (3) for higher
speeds.
This is like four-wheel drive, but there is no separate
lever or switch to engage or disengage the front axle. It
is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for
road conditions.
You may experience a brief vehicle vibration upon
acceleration when driving in slippery conditions. This is
normal and is an indication that the all-wheel drive
system is functioning properly.
more information.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle will
not downshift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slow enough.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-35.
Parking Brake
The parking brake is
located under the
instrument panel on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down with your right foot while you push down on
the parking brake pedal with your left foot. When you
lift your left foot from the parking brake pedal, it will pop
up to the released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot and push down on the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-38.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever was
not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pulling the
shift lever toward you and moving it up as far as it
will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Parking Over Things That Burn
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
vehicle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle
may put too much force on the parking pawl in the
transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever
out of PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s
seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-38.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition,
you must fully apply your regular brakes before you can
shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
While sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the
mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip
the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to
side. The day/night adjustment can lessen glare from the
headlamps behind your vehicle. Pull the tab forward for
daytime use; push it back for night use.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
page 4-38.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
The controls, located on
the driver’s door, operate
both outside rearview
mirrors.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.
Push the top control to the left or right to choose either
the driver’s or passenger’s outside rearview mirror.
Leave the control in the center position to prevent
moving the mirrors once they are adjusted.
Use the arrows on the bottom control to adjust the
position of each mirror. Adjust each mirror so that you
can see the side of your vehicle and the area behind it,
while sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Outside Heated Mirrors
The outside heated rearview mirrors are activated when
the rear window defogger is turned on. See “Rear
page 3-24.
Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward
to prevent damage when going through car washes
or confined spaces.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
Safe and Sound Plan
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
• Roadside Assistance
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
OnStar® Services
• RideAssist
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
• Information and Convenience Services
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is an available hands-free wireless phone that
is integrated into the vehicle. Calls can be placed
nationwide using simple voice commands with no
additional contracts and no additional roaming charges.
To find out more about OnStar® Personal Calling,
refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in the vehicle’s glove
box or visit www.onstar.com or www.onstarcanada.com;
or speak with an OnStar® advisor by pressing the
OnStar® button or by calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment and more. Customize
your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
HomeLink, a combined universal transmitter and
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand−held transmitters used to activate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink information can be found on the Internet
at www.homelink.com or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped with the HomeLink®
transmitter, it complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System Operation
Do not use the HomeLink® Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982. If you have a newer
garage door opener with rolling codes, please be
sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to complete the
programming of your HomeLink® Transmitter.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the HomeLink® Transmitter. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink® programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink® buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink®
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink® on the
Internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink® successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
Programming HomeLink®
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 under “Programming HomeLink®.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink® buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink® and the hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink® button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling-code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink®.” You do
not want to repeat Step 1, as this will erase all
previous programming.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator by using the
“Programming HomeLink®” procedures (regardless of
where you live), replace Step 3 under “Programming
HomeLink®” with the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLink®. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink®”
to complete.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using HomeLink®
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink® button for at
least half of a second. The indicator light will come
on while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink®
Button
To program a device to HomeLink® using a HomeLink®
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.
Do not release the button.
Erasing HomeLink® Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink®
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink®” shown earlier in this section.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink® to default settings do the following:
2. Release both buttons.
HomeLink® is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink®” shown earlier in this
section.
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink®
indicator light turns off.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink® Button” following this section.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at
1-800-355-3515, or on the Internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cupholder(s)
Storage Areas
There are cupholders located below the center
instrument panel switchbank. The cupholders have a
rubber liner that can be removed, so that larger cups can
fit into the cupholders. You can also remove the liner
to clean it.
Your vehicle’s large carrying capacity can store many
items. If the vehicle has an extended wheelbase, it can
carry even larger items. The floor pins that are used
to attach the seats, can be used to secure larger loads.
There may be additional storage areas behind the
seats. Pull the lid towards you to open the storage.
To use the cupholders, pull the tray out. Push the tray
back when not in use.
Glove Box
Overhead Console (With Rail)
If the glove box has a lock, put your key into the lock
and turn the key counterclockwise. To open the
glove box, pull the latch release.
If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead console, it
may contain the following:
The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door
from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door
is partway open, then pull the door down if you need
it fully opened.
page 3-19.
To close the glove box, the door must be pushed up
past the detent. To lock the glove box, put your key into
the lock and turn the key clockwise.
page 2-43.
See your retailer to purchase additional items for the rail
system.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage Bin
Your vehicle may have a storage bin located on the
overhead rail that you can use for storage.
4. Firmly press down making sure the latch is flat with
the ribs (A) on the storage bin.
5. Switch hands and repeat Steps 2 through 4 for the
latch on the opposite side of the storage bin.
1. Place the storage bin on to the rails in the desired
location.
6. Reverse these steps in order to remove the
storage bin.
2. Push firmly upward on the bin while supporting it
with one hand.
The contents of the bin should never weigh more than
1.5 lbs (0.7 kg).
3. Push in on the latch and then rotate it 90 degrees.
Always make sure to close and latch the bin before
driving.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overhead Console (Without Rail)
Folding Tray
If your vehicle has an overhead console without the rail
system, it has two reading lights, a courtesy light,
and a switchbank. See Overhead Console Switchbank
on page 3-19 for more information.
Your vehicle may be
equipped with folding
convenience trays located
between seats. To use
each tray lift up on
the handle located on its
front end, while pulling
up on the tray to lock it into
place. There are four
cupholders on each tray.
Floor Console Storage Area
If your vehicle has a storage compartment located on
the front console below the front cupholders. Pull up and
then forward on the handle to open the storage
compartment.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Center Console
Second Row Center Console
If your vehicle has the second row center console, use
the following procedure to remove or install the
console.
{CAUTION:
Removing the Center Console
1. Locate the attachment lever in an opening on the
rear of the console
A second row center console that is not locked
into place properly can move around in a
crash or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to lock the console
into place properly when installing it.
2. Pull the attachment lever upward to release the
attachment hook.
3. Lift the console up to remove it from the vehicle.
1. Position the second row center console above the
forward floor attachments between the second row
bucket seats.
For information on installing the seats, see Rear
2. Place the console’s front hooks onto the forward
floor attachments.
3. Locate the attachment lever at the rear of the
console and pull up.
4. Rock the rear attachment bracket onto the floor
attachment and release the lever.
5. Pull up on the console to ensure the rear
attachment hook is latched.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-31.
Luggage Carrier
{CAUTION:
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving,
check now and then to make sure the cargo is still
securely fastened.
If you try to carry something on top of your
vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier — like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth — the wind can catch it as you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to have a collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry
something longer or wider than the luggage
carrier on top of your vehicle.
Convenience Net (with Hideaway
Rear Storage Bins)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep small loads,
from falling out of the vehicle when the liftgate is
opened. Install the convenience net at the rear of your
vehicle, inside the liftgate.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both sides of
the liftgate opening. The label on the net should be
in the upper left corner.
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not standard on
this vehicle and must be purchased at your retailer.
2. Attach the lower loops to the tabs at the rear edge
of the rear hideaway rear storage bins.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 150 lbs (68 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take down
the convenience net to extend the life of the net and
to help retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear
exit clear.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Convenience Net (without Hideaway
Rear Storage Bins)
Hideaway Rear Storage Bins
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep small loads,
like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the
convenience net at the rear of your vehicle, inside the
liftgate.
{CAUTION:
If any removable convenience item is not
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on both sides of
the liftgate opening. The label on the net should be
in the upper left corner.
Your vehicle may have hideaway rear storage bins. It
provides extra storage space for the rear of the vehicle.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings on
the floor.
To open the hideaway rear storage bins, pull up on
the door latch located on the front of the cover.
The hideaway rear storage bins cover has two automatic
prop rods to hold it up and in place.
3. Once you have loaded items into the net, stretch
the higher side of the net up and over the top of
the load to hold it firmly in place.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of
100 lbs (45 kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier
loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle,
as far forward as you can.
To close the cover, you must pull one of the prop rod
linkages toward you while holding onto the door
latch and lower the cover to close it.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take down
the convenience net to extend the life of the net and
to help retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear
exit clear.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the hideaway rear storage bins up and into the
rear of the vehicle.
Removing the Hideaway Rear
Storage Bins
1. Make sure that all items are off the hideaway rear
storage bins and that they are empty.
4. Slide the hideaway rear storage bins in and align it
to the rear seat.
5. Press down on the front of the hideaway rear
storage bins so the center is aligned on the sill
mounting bracket.
2. Turn the hand knob, located at the rear of the
hideaway rear storage bins, counterclockwise
until the knob is loose.
6. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.
3. Lift up on the hand knob, then grip and pull up on
the hideaway rear storage bins to remove them
from the vehicle.
7. Pull up on the hideaway rear storage bins to make
sure they are locked into place.
The cover of the hideaway rear storage bins can be left
in its upright position while the vehicle is moving.
Replacing the Hideaway Rear
Storage Bins
1. Make sure the third row seat is properly installed in
more information. If the third row seat is not in
the vehicle with the hideaway rear storage bins, the
hideaway rear storage bins will not be locked
into the correct position in the vehicle.
The hideaway rear storage bins and the third row
seat both have a maximum weight capacity of
400 lbs (181.6 kg).
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
2. Make sure that the hideaway rear storage bins are
empty and closed.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-40
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
page 3-14.
C. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
on page 3-16. Instrument Panel Brightness Control.
E. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls (If
page 3-43.
F. Traction Control System Button (If Equipped). See
page 3-10.
page 3-24.
H. Passenger Airbag Status And Passenger Seatbelt
Reminder Indicator. See Passenger Airbag
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Horn
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
instrument panel.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
To tilt the wheel, hold the
wheel and pull the lever.
Then move the wheel
to a comfortable position
and release the lever
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
to lock the wheel in place.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
page 3-9.
on page 3-9.
on page 3-9.
on page 3-9.
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior Lamps
on page 3-14.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have a trailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash at a
normal rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned
out. Check the front and rear turn signal lamps regularly
to make sure they are working.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up
or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
Turn Signal On Chime
If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to turn
it off. If you need to leave the signal on for more than
3/4 mile (1.2 km), turn off the signal and then turn it
back on.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal/multifunction lever away from you.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
When the high beams are
on, this light will appear on
the instrument panel
cluster.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers will not see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward you.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
Flash-to-Pass
When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you
to momentarily turn on the high beams. This will
signal that you are going to pass. When you release the
lever, they will turn off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
LQ (Windshield Washer): Press and hold the
windshield washer paddle with this symbol on it to wash
your windshield. The washers and wipers will operate.
8(Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more
wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and
the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless
your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers
will resume the wiper speed you had selected earlier.
9(Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
N(Delay): You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the delay
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Washer/Wiper
Cruise Control
The controls for the rear
window washer/wiper are
located on the end of
the turn signal/multifunction
lever.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the
rear washers/wipers off.
Z (Rear Wiper): Move the lever to this position to
turn the rear wipers on.
The cruise control lever is
located below the
windshield wiper control on
the right side of the
steering wheel.
= (Rear Washer/Wiper): Move the lever to this
position to wash and wipe the rear window.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Q RES + (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever up to
resume the cruise control speed, or to accelerate
when passing another vehicle.
{CAUTION:
J (CRUISE CONTROL) ON/OFF q: Press the
button on the end of the lever to turn the cruise control
on. Press it again to turn cruise control off.
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
R SET — (Set/Coast/Decelerate): Push the lever
down to set the cruise speed. If the cruise speed
is already set this position can be used to coast or
decelerate from a higher speed.
CANCEL R: Pull the lever to cancel the cruise
control speed.
1. Push the button at the end of the cruise control
lever to turn the cruise control on.
Cruise control allows a speed of approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more to be maintained without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. This is helpful on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
3. Push down on the cruise control lever and release
it. This will set the speed in cruise control.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
conditions allow, the cruise control can be used again.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This symbol will appear on
the instrument panel
cluster when the cruise
control is set.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Push up on the cruise control lever toward
the plus (resume/accelerate) position, then
release the lever and take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the
higher speed.
This symbol will disappear when the brakes are applied
or the cruise control is cancelled. It will reappear
when the set cruise speed is resumed.
• Push up and hold the cruise control lever toward
the plus (resume/accelerate) position until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed. Then release
the cruise control lever. To increase the vehicle’s
speed in very small amounts, push up briefly on the
cruise control lever and release it. Each time this
is done, the vehicle will speed up approximately
one mph (1.6 km/h).
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control shuts off.
But the cruise control does not need to be reset.
Once the vehicle is traveling approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, the cruise control lever can be
pushed upward toward the plus (resume/accelerate)
position to return to the preset cruise speed.
The acceleration feature will only work after the cruise
control speed has been set by pushing the cruise control
lever down to the set position.
The vehicle will return to and stay at the preset cruise
speed. If the cruise control lever is pushed up and
held toward the plus (resume/accelerate) position, the
vehicle speed will increase until the lever is released or
the brakes are applied. Do not continue to hold the
lever in the plus (resume/accelerate) position, unless a
faster speed is desired.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills, the accelerator
pedal might have to be used in order to maintain
the vehicle’s speed. When going downhill, the brakes
might have to be applied, or the transaxle might have to
be shifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. Doing either of these things will take the
vehicle out of cruise. It may be better not to use the
cruise control if the brakes constantly have to be
applied, or the vehicle continuously needs to be shifted
to a lower gear.
There are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speed while
using cruise control:
• Push the cruise control lever downward toward the
minus (set/coast/decelerate) position until a lower
speed is reached, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
cruise control lever downward toward the minus
(set/coast/decelerate) position briefly. Each time this
is done, the vehicle will slow down approximately
one mph (1.6 km/h).
Cancelling Cruise Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
To cancel a cruise control session, pull the cruise
control lever forward, or step lightly on the brake pedal.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed
set earlier.
Doing either of these things will only end the current
cruise control session, but the set speed will be retained
in memory.
Push the button at the end of the cruise control lever to
turn the system off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off, the
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Due to the momentary switch design, your automatic
lights may be disabled even if the control is in the AUTO
position.
Exterior Lamps
The control to the left of
the steering column
operates the exterior
lamps.
; (Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the parking lamps together with the
following:
• Taillamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
5 (Headlamps): Turn the control to this position to
turn on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
9 (Off): Turn the control to this position to toggle off
all lamps. This is a momentary control that will spring
back to AUTO when released.
This feature, if equipped, will automatically activate the
headlamps and parking lamps after the windshield
wipers have been in use for about 30 seconds and when
all of the following conditions are met.
This momentary control will turn the automatic
headlamps and/or the Daytime Running Lamps on and
off for U.S. vehicles. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
this is only true when the transaxle is in PARK (P).
• The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
• The headlamps have not already been activated by
automatic lighting.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this position to
set your headlamps in automatic mode. AUTO mode,
if enabled, will turn the exterior lamps on and off
automatically depending on how much light is available
outside the vehicle.
• The automatic lighting feature has not been
disabled using the exterior lamp control.
information.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the wipers are activated for over 30 seconds and the
exterior lamp control is in the parking lamps position,
or the automatic lighting feature has been disabled using
the exterior lamp control, a HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
message will appear on the Driver Information Center,
if equipped.
The DRL system will make front parking and turn signal
lamps come on in daylight when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is off.
When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps
will be on. Your instrument panel will not be lit up.
Headlamps on Reminder
When it is dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will
come on automatically. When it is bright enough
outside, the exterior lamps will turn off and the DRL will
turn on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps
any time you need to.
If you turn the ignition to LOCK while leaving the lamps
on, you will hear a warning chime once the driver’s
door is opened.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
30 seconds for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
Daytime Running Lamps are required on all vehicles first
sold in Canada.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamps off, toggle the exterior lamp control to off
after starting the vehicle.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the
DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Interior Lamps Control
The knob to adjust the
instrument panel
brightness is located in the
center of the interior
lamp controls.
The interior lamp control is
located to the right of the
exterior lamp controls
on the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
column.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights and
counterclockwise to dim them.
R (Interior Lamp Override): Turn the outer knob to
this position to have your interior lamps remain off
while any door is open.
1 (Door): Turn the outer knob to this position to turn
the interior lamps on while any door is open and
when the ignition key is removed from the ignition.
+ (Interior Lamps): Turn the outer knob to
this position to turn the interior lamps on.
Turn the inner knob to adjust the instrument panel
brightness, described earlier in this section.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not been
Dome Lamp
The dome lamp is located in the headliner and has two
buttons to manually turn it on or off. The dome lamp
will come on each time you open a door, unless you turn
on the interior lamps override feature. See Interior
To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, see DIC
Delayed Lighting
Entry Lighting
The delayed lighting feature will continue to illuminate
the interior for 20 seconds after all doors have been
closed, so that you can find your ignition and buckle your
safety belt at night. Delayed lighting will not occur
while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY. After
20 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly
fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 20 seconds
have passed if you do one of the following:
With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle is
illuminated so that you can see inside before you enter
your vehicle. The lamps will come on for 20 seconds
if you unlock your door using your key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter and the ignition is in LOCK.
After 20 seconds have passed, the interior lamps
will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn off before the
20 seconds if you do one of the following:
• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
• Lock all the doors using the key.
• Press lock on the power door lock switch.
• Press lock on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
• Lock all doors using the power door lock switch or
the key.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or
the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors
and the liftgate are closed.
To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see DIC
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exit Lighting
Front Reading Lamps
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for
about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from
the ignition. If you turn the ignition key to RUN or
ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The lamps will
also fade out if you lock the doors with the power
door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
There are two reading lamps and one courtesy lamp in
the overhead console. To turn either reading lamp
on or off, press the lens of the lamp. The courtesy lamp
will come on each time you open a door, unless you
turn on the interior lamps override feature. See Interior
When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or
the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors
and the liftgate are closed.
Rear Reading Lamps
There are two reading lamps in the third row headliner.
To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lens
of the lamp.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 20 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not been
There may also be a reading lamp in the second row,
integrated with the dome lamp. To turn the second
row reading lamp on or off, press the button next to the
lamp lens.
To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see DIC
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Lamp
Overhead Console Switchbank
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle,
above the liftgate opening, and does not have a switch.
The cargo lamp will come on each time you open a
door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override. See
Battery Run-Down Protection
The overhead console switchbank is located in the
overhead console. This switchbank may include
the following:
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
interior lamps on. If you leave any interior lamps on
while the ignition is in lock or off, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps will not come
back on again until you do one of the following:
• Power Sliding Door(s)/Override Switch(es).
• Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY
• Open a closed door, or close and reopen a door.
• Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
Disable Switch. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking
• Turn the interior lamps on if they are in the door or
override position.
• Turn the interior lamps to the door or override
position and then to on again if the interior
lamp control is in the on position.
If your vehicle does not have some of these options,
there will be a blank.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on the
odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps after
only three minutes.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle is equipped with the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system, it is designed to help you
park, while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). It operates
only at very low speeds, less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
URPA can help make parking easier and to help you
avoid colliding with objects such as parked vehicles. The
URPA system can detect objects up to 5 feet (1.5 m)
behind the vehicle, and tell you how close these objects
are from your rear bumper.
Even with the Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist
system, the driver must check carefully before
backing up. The system does not operate
above typical backing speeds of 3 mph
(5 km/h) while parking. And, the system does
not detect objects that are more than 5 feet
(1.5 meters) behind the vehicle.
So, unless you check carefully behind you
before and when you back up, you could strike
children, pedestrians, bicyclists or pets behind
you, and they could be injured or killed.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less
than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located
at the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the
object. The URPA display is located inside the vehicle,
near the rear window. It has three color-coded lights
used to provide distance and system information to
the driver.
Whether or not you are using rear park assist,
always check carefully behind your vehicle
before you back up and then watch closely as
you do.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
URPA can be turned off by
pressing the rear park aid
disable switch located
in the overhead console
switchbank. While the
system is disabled,
an indicator light will be lit
on the switch. You will
not see any lights on the
rear display if the switch is
in the off position.
How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R). When
the system turns on, the three lights on the display
will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let you know
that the system is working. If your vehicle is moving in
REVERSE (R) at a speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h),
the red light will flash to remind you that the system
does not work at speed greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
English
5 ft
40 in
Metric
1.5 m
1.0 m
amber/amber/red lights &
continuous chime
20 in
0.5 m
amber/amber/red lights
flashing & continuous
chime
1 ft
0.3 m
A chime will sound the first time an object is detected
between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object, it
must be within detection range behind the vehicle.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the System Does Not Seem to Work
Properly
Accessory Power Outlets
Your vehicle may be equipped with a front accessory
power outlet located below the climate controls on
the instrument panel. It can be used to plug in electrical
equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of air
brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning the
rear bumper and then driving forward at least 15 mph
(25 km/h), the display continues to flash red, see
your dealer.
Pull the cover down to use the accessory power outlet.
When not in use, keep the cover on.
The rear accessory power outlet is located on the rear
compartment on the driver’s side.
To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and pull
it off. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at
the back of the cover and put the cover in place. Push
down the tab to secure the cover. When not in use,
always cover the rear accessory power outlet with the
protective cap.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may
also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
behind the vehicle.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your retailer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
retailer before adding electrical equipment.
The power outlet is located
behind the third row seats
on the passenger’s
side rear quarter trim
panel.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly if these
items are plugged into the power outlet:
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage such as:
compressor-driven refrigerators and electric
power tools.
Your vehicle may have a power outlet that can be used
to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment with a
maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try to use equipment
that requires more than the limit, a protection circuit
will cut the power supply. To reset the outlet, unplug the
item and plug it back in or turn the ignition key to
OFF or ACC and then back on. The power will
automatically restart when equipment that operates
within the limit is plugged in.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as: microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
Climate Controls
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
Climate Control System
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining
air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper
outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the
vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of
objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of
the vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Air: This mode will be automatically selected
when your vehicle is in any mode except maximum
air conditioning.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to 0 to turn off the fan. The fan must
be turned on for the air conditioning compressor
to operate.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
# MAX (Maximum Air Conditioning): Turn the right
knob to this position for maximum air conditioning.
This will select air conditioning and recirculation
for maximum cooling of your vehicle. This mode directs
air to the instrument panel outlets.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the air
temperature inside your vehicle.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air-conditioning system on or off. When it is pressed, an
indicator light in the button will come on to let you
know that air conditioning is activated.
Recirculation: This mode keeps outside air from
coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or help heat
or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
This mode will automatically be selected when you
select maximum air conditioning.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
( (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn on the
heated seats. The button on the left controls the driver’s
seat and the button on the right controls the passenger’s
information.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity,
or moisture, condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield. Use the defog mode to clear
the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If turned on again, the
defogger will only run for about five minutes before
turning off. The defogger can also be turned off
by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
- (Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window outlets, with some
air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode, the system
will automatically turn off recirculation and run the
air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation cannot
be selected while in the defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Climate Control System
Your vehicle may have a rear climate control system
that allows the driver to adjust the fan speed for the rear
seating area. This system works with the main climate
control system in your vehicle.
k (Open): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to
open the air outlets.
l (Closed): Turn the thumbwheel to this position to
close the air outlets.
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
This thumbwheel is located below the main climate
control system on the instrument panel. Use this
thumbwheel to adjust the fan speed for the rear seat
passengers.
9 (Fan): Slide the thumbwheel to 1, 2, or 3 to
increase or decrease airflow to the rear seating area.
Slide the fan knob to 0 to turn the fan off.
AUX: Slide the thumbwheel to AUX to allow the rear
passengers to adjust the temperature and airflow to the
rear seating area.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may also have a rear climate control
system that allows the rear passengers to adjust the
temperature and fan speed for the rear seating area.
t r (Decrease Setting): Press this button to
decrease the fan or temperature setting when arrows
are active in the display.
When the front climate control is in AUX and the
rear climate control fan or temperature button is
pressed, the display will show the same airflow modes
as the front climate control system. See Climate
Control System on page 3-24
[ u (Increase Setting): Press this button to
increase the fan or temperature setting when arrows are
active in display.
9 (Fan): Press this button to increase or decrease
fan speed. After pressing this button, arrows and a fan
will appear in the display. The arrows indicate that to
increase or decrease fan speed, you need to press
either the left or right arrow button. The displayed arrows
and fan will disappear after a few seconds.
b (Temperature): Press this button to increase or
decrease temperature. After pressing this button, arrows
and a temperature scale will appear in the display.
The arrows indicate that to increase or decrease
temperature, you need to press either the left or right
arrow button. The displayed arrows and temperature
scale will disappear after a few seconds.
The front control must be in AUX position to enable
adjustment of the temperature and fan speed on the rear
control system. If it is not in AUX, pressing the fan or
temperature button on the rear climate control will show
a DISABLED message on the rear seat entertainment
system display.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Rear Air Outlets
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air return
outlet. Be sure to keep it free from obstructions.
Also, keep the area around the base of the center
instrument panel console, between and under the front
seats, free of objects that could also obstruct airflow
to the rear seating area.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
For more information on how to use the main climate
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically. The
indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.
tn i
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The tachometer displays
the engine speed in
revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. The new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can display how far you have driven
since you last reset it.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
For more information see DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-43.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds. If
the driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will
come on.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light comes on if there is an electrical problem. The
system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or
START, a chime will be provided for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt.
This would only occur if a passenger is detected by the
passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing
passenger safety belt light will also be provided and
stay on for several seconds, then it will flash for several
more. You should have the passenger buckle their
safety belt.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then
the light should go out.
This means the system
is ready.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will be provided.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the airbag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and side impact airbag (if equipped).
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s airbag
page 1-74 for more on this, including important safety
information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s airbag or airbags are enabled (may inflate).
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag. Do
not use a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front passenger’s seat.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the airbags.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on when you set your parking brake. The
light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show you it is working.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need
both parts working well.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate
that you have problems with a generator drive belt, or
another electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving while this light is on could drain your
battery.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a
problem.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Anti-Lock Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning
Light
Your vehicle has an
anti-lock brake system
warning light. The anti-lock
brake system warning
light should come on for a
few seconds when you
turn the ignition key
to RUN.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs
service and you do not have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If
the light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Your vehicle is equipped
with a traction control
system warning light.
The traction control system warning light may come on
for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by pressing the traction
control button. To turn the system back on, press
the button again. The warning light should go
for more information.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
red gage lamp turns on, your engine is too hot!
• If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning light will come
on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
It means that your engine coolant has overheated. If
you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your retailer can check the vehicle. Your retailer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
If you have low engine oil
pressure, this light will stay
on after you start your
engine, or come on when
you are driving.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough
oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could have
some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately by
your retailer.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your retailer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working. The light will go out when you turn
the ignition on. If it does not come on with the
ignition on, you may have a problem with the fuse
or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Light
{CAUTION:
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The light will go out when the cruise control is turned
information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps or the
Flash-to-Pass feature
is in use.
Security Light
For information regarding
this light, see
on page 2-25.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things some owners ask about. All these
things are normal and do not indicate that anything
is wrong with the fuel gage.
Fuel Gage
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the
gage reads. For example, the gage read half full,
but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fill it.
• The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
• The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
is turned off.
United States
Canada
When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little
fuel left, but you should get more soon.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is on.
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If equipped, the outside air temperature automatically
appears in the bottom right corner of the DIC display
when viewing all of the information screens, except for
the oil life screens. If the outside air temperature is
at or below 37°F (3°C), the temperature reading
will toggle between displaying the outside temperature
and the word ICE for two minutes. If there is a problem
with the system that controls the temperature display,
the letters OC (open circuit) or SC (short circuit)
will appear on the display. If this occurs, have the
vehicle serviced by your retailer.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All messages will appear in the DIC display located in
the instrument panel cluster, below the tachometer. The
DIC buttons are located on the center of the instrument
panel, below the center outlets.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display WELCOME DRIVER (1 or 2)
if a personalized key 1 or 2 is used, and then the
information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized or
personalized, if equipped. See DIC Vehicle
information.
The DIC displays the odometer, trip odometers, fuel
economy, trip computer, vehicle system information, and
compass display, if equipped. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is detected. In addition,
the DIC displays phone numbers that are called
DIC Operation and Displays
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the DIC buttons located on the center of the
instrument panel. The buttons are the information,
set/reset, and menu buttons.
The button functions are detailed in the following pages.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons
Information Button Items
Q4R (Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following items:
Odometer
Press the information button until the odometer displays.
This mode shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles or kilometers.
Q4R (Information): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip distance, time elapsed, average speed,
fuel economy, battery voltage, oil life, and to turn off
the DIC.
Trip A and Trip B
Press the information button until A or B displays. This
mode shows the current distance traveled in either
miles or kilometers since the last reset for each
trip odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the
same time.
r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
The display will show the odometer on the top line and
the trip odometer information, either A or B, on the
bottom line.
q (Menu): Press this button to display the units,
language, personalization, if equipped, compass zone
and compass calibration, if equipped. See DIC
more information.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing the set/reset button while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also a retroactive trip odometer function that
performs the following for each trip odometer:
TIME ELAPSED feature will automatically start timing
where it left off when you last stopped. To reset it, press
and hold the set/reset button for approximately
1.5 seconds. The display will return to zero.
• If the vehicle’s speed has exceeded 3 mph (5 km/h)
during the current ignition cycle, this function will
set the trip odometer to the distance driven
during the current ignition cycle.
Average Speed
Press the information button until AVERAGE SPEED
displays. This mode shows the average speed of the
vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is calculated based on the
various vehicle speed recorded since the last reset of this
value. To reset the value, press the information button to
display AVERAGE SPEED, then press and hold the
set/reset button. The display will return to zero.
• If the vehicle’s speed has not exceeded 3 mph
(5 km/h), this function will set the trip odometer
to the distance driven during the previous ignition
cycle plus the distance driven during the current
ignition cycle.
Press and hold the set/reset button for three seconds,
then release the button. The retroactive trip odometer
value will be set into the currently displayed trip
odometer.
Fuel Range
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE
displays. This mode shows the approximate number of
remaining miles or kilometers the vehicle can be
driven without refueling.
Time Elapsed
Press the information button until TIME ELAPSED :00
displays. This mode is like a stopwatch, in that you can
clock the time it takes to get from one point to another.
Each of the fields for the hours, minutes, and seconds
are two numeric digits.
Fuel range is based on several factors, including
distance travelled, fuel used, fuel capacity, etc. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this mode may read one number, but if the vehicle
is driven on a freeway, the number may change even
though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank.
Once TIME ELAPSED :00 is displayed, press the
set/reset button to start the timing feature. Press the
set/reset button again to stop it. If you will be starting
and stopping your vehicle, during a trip for instance, the
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This is because different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving
produces better fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Battery
Press the information button until BATTERY displays.
This mode shows the current battery voltage.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system, a
DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings and
If your vehicle is low on fuel, FUEL RANGE LOW will
display followed by the LOW FUEL message. See “LOW
page 3-49 for more information.
Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage based
on the state of the battery. The battery voltage may
fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC. This
is normal.
Average Fuel Economy
Press the information button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This mode shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY,
press and hold the set/reset button. The display
will return to zero.
Oil Life
Press the information button until OIL LIFE displays.
This mode shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining
useful life. If you see OIL LIFE 99% on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine
oil life system will alert you to change your oil on a
schedule consistent with your driving conditions.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
When the remaining oil life is low, the LOW OIL
PRESSURE message will appear on the display. You
should change your oil as soon as possible. See Engine
system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
more information.
Press the information button until INST ECONOMY
displays. This mode shows the current fuel economy at
a particular moment and will change frequently as
driving conditions change. This mode shows the
instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average
fuel economy, this screen cannot be reset.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after
each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any
time other than when the oil has just been changed. It
cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life
when the system is reset.
Language
Press the menu button until the language screen
displays. This mode allows you to select the language
in which the DIC messages will appear. Once in
this mode, press the set/reset button to select among
the following choices:
• English
• Francais (French)
• Espanol (Spanish)
Menu Button Items
q (Menu): Press this button to scroll through the
Personalization (Uplevel Only)
following items:
Press the menu button until PERSONAL PROGRAM
displays. Your vehicle may have personalization
capabilities that allow you to program certain features to
a preferred setting for up to two drivers.
Units
Press the menu button until UNITS displays. This mode
allows you to select between English or Metric units
of measurement. Once in this mode, press the set/reset
button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC.
Your vehicle may also have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to one
preferred setting. Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be
programmed to a preferred setting for up to two
drivers. See DIC Vehicle Personalization (Uplevel Only)
on page 3-64 for additional information on personal
programming.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Zone (Uplevel Only)
Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE displays.
Press the set/reset button to change the compass
zone. Zones 1 through 15 are available. The direction
the vehicle is moving will be displayed in the top
right corner of the DIC display.
Compass Calibration (Uplevel Only)
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
compensate for compass variance and reset the zone
through the DIC.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the compass
in the vehicle could give false readings.
In order to do this, the compass must be set or
calibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
travelling.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
4. Press the menu button to advance to the
COMPASS CALIBRATION screen.
1. Press the menu button until COMPASS ZONE
displays.
5. To start the compass calibration, press and hold the
set/reset button until CALIBRATION BEGUN DRIVE
UNTIL DONE appears in the DIC display.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle two times to
activate the compass.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear,
not correct the problem.
When the calibration is complete, the DIC will
display CALIBRATION FINISHED.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
7. If the message CAL appears in the DIC, you must
manually put the compass into the calibration mode
again. Repeat Steps 1 through 6.
A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTION
This message will display when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor will turn back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
that you received the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
This message will come on while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
warning message and to clear it from the screen.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If there are any active warning messages when the
vehicle is turned off, two chimes will sound and the DIC
will go into a reminder mode. The reminder mode
displays any active message. If there are multiple
messages, the DIC will display each message for
five seconds. After each active message is displayed
once, the reminder mode will turn off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on. If this message continues
to appear, have the system repaired by your retailer
as soon as possible to avoid damage to your engine.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor the battery voltage by pressing the
information button until BATTERY displays.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE DISABLED
If your vehicle has the all-wheel drive system, this
message will display when there is a spare tire on the
vehicle, or when the anti-lock brake system warning light
comes on, or when the rear differential fluid is
overheating. This message will turn off when the
differential fluid cools.
CHANGE OIL SOON
This message will display when service is required for
more information.
The all-wheel drive system will be disabled until the
compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the
warning message is still on after putting on the full-size
tire, you need to reset the warning message. To
reset the warning message, turn the ignition off and
then back on again. If the message stays on, see your
retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset by
acknowledging the message. The OIL LIFE screen
under the gages menu on the DIC must also be reset.
This message will display while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message will display when the system detects that
the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable
level. The battery saver system will start reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may be able to notice.
At the point that the features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the vehicle is trying to
save the charge in the battery.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message will display and a chime will sound while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
This message will display when there is a problem with
the generator and battery charging systems. Driving
with this problem could drain your battery. Turn off all
unnecessary accessories. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. Have the electrical
system checked by your retailer immediately.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display and a chime will sound while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
DELAYED LOCKING
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display to inform the driver that even
though a door lock switch or the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter has been pressed, that
actual locking of the doors is being delayed because
the delayed locking feature has been activated in
the DIC. See “DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC Vehicle
information.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message will display if the gas cap is not on, or is
not fully tightened. Check the gas cap to ensure that
for more information.
This message will appear and a chime will sound when
the ignition is off.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVER’S DOOR AJAR
DRIVER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message will display when the driver’s door is not
closed properly. When this message appears, you
should make sure that the driver’s door is closed
completely.
This message will display when the driver’s side rear
door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, you should make sure that the driver’s side
rear door is closed completely.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-25 for more information.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
HEADLAMPS SUGGESTED
This message will display when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperature
warning light will also appear on the instrument panel
page 3-37 for more information.
This message will display when the amount of available
light outside of the vehicle is low, or the windshield
wipers have been on for approximately 30 seconds, and
the exterior lamps control is off or in the park lamps
position. This message informs the driver that turning on
the exterior lamps is recommended. See Exterior
To avoid added strain on the engine, turn off the air
conditioner if it is on. When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air conditioner can be turned
back on.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will display only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound continuously when this
message is displayed. Press any of the DIC buttons to
acknowledge this message and to clear it from the
screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HOOD AJAR
KEY FOB BATTERY LOW
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message will display when the hood is not closed
properly. When this message appears, you should make
sure that the hood is closed completely. See Hood
This message will display when the battery in the
remote keyless entry transmitter needs to be replaced.
To replace the battery, see “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
KEY IN IGNITION
This message will display and a chime will sound
continuously when the driver’s door is open and the key
is in the ignition and in the accessory or off position.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message will disappear and the chiming will stop
when the key is removed from the ignition.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
This message will display when the left front turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps and
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
LIFT GATE AJAR
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display when the liftgate is not closed
completely. You should make sure that the liftgate is
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display when the left rear turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn
This message will display while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The message will display and a chime will sound while
the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons
to acknowledge this message and to clear it from
the screen.
LOW BRAKE FLUID
This message will display when the brake fluid level is
low. Fill the brake master cylinder to the proper
for the location of the brake master cylinder reservoir.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
LOW OIL PRESSURE
The brake system warning light will also appear on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears
page 3-35.
Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warning
message appears on the DIC display, stop the
vehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Severe engine damage can result from driving a
vehicle with low oil pressure. See Engine Oil
on page 5-13 for more information.
This message will display and a chime will sound only
while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display when the vehicle’s engine oil
pressure is low. The oil pressure light will also appear
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure Light
on page 3-40.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your retailer as soon as
possible when this message is displayed.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
LOW FUEL
This message will display only when the ignition is in
RUN. A chime will sound continuously when this
message is displayed.
This message will display when your vehicle is low on
fuel. You should refill the tank as soon as possible. See
page 5-8 for more information.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen. This message will re-display for a few
seconds if the condition still exists when the engine
is turned off.
PARK LAMPS ON
This message will display to alert the driver when the
headlamps or parking lamps are on while the ignition is
off and the driver’s door is opened. See Exterior
sound continuously while this message is displayed.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
PARKING BRAKE ON
This message cannot be acknowledged.
This message will display to alert the driver when the
vehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is in RUN, and
the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Release the parking brake before driving. See Parking
PASSENGER’S DOOR AJAR
This message will display when the front passenger’s
door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, you should make sure that the front
passenger’s door is closed completely.
The brake light will also appear on the instrument panel
cluster when this message appears on the DIC. See
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
A chime will sound continuously while this message is
displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h). Press
any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this message
and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on, the
vehicle is in motion, the driver is unbuckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger airbag is
enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already
PASSENGER’S REAR DOOR AJAR
This message will display when the passenger’s side
rear door is not closed properly. When this message
appears, you should make sure that the passenger’s
side rear door is closed completely.
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN. A
chime will sound when the ignition is shifted out of
PARK (P). Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge
this message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will display when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. This happens when driving conditions,
such as climbing a steep hill, make the transaxle
overwork in a gear that may cause damage to the
vehicle’s engine or transaxle. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display and a chime will sound only
when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
PASSENGER SEATBELT IS NOT
FASTENED
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
seat belt.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REDUCED POWER STOP WHEN SAFE
REMOTE START DISABLED
This message will display when your vehicle is in an
overheated engine operating mode. This operating mode
allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an
emergency. In this mode, you will notice a significant
loss in power and engine performance. See Overheated
more information. Anytime this message is on, the
vehicle should be taken to your retailer for service as
soon as possible.
This warning message will come on if a remote start
attempt is unsuccessful. This may be caused if any of
the following conditions are true when a remote
start attempt is made:
• The remote start system is disabled through
the DIC.
• The key is in the ignition.
• The hood or the doors are not closed.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
• The engine coolant temperature is too high.
• The oil pressure is low.
This message will display and a chime will sound only
when the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.
• The maximum number of remote starts or remote
start attempts between ignition cycles has been
reached.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on while
attempting to remote start the vehicle.
See “REMOTE START” under DIC Vehicle
“Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
REMOTE START ON
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, this
message will display when a remote start is initiated.
See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote Keyless Entry
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUT
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will display when the right front turn
signal bulb needs to be replaced. See Headlamps and
SERVICE ABS SYSTEM
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will display when the vehicle’s brakes are
not functioning properly. Have the brake system
serviced by your retailer as soon as possible.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will also
appear on the instrument panel cluster when this
message appears on the DIC. See Anti-Lock Brake
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will only display while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUT
This message will display when the right rear turn signal
bulb needs to be replaced. See Taillamps, Turn
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will display while the ignition is in RUN.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message will only display while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message will display when a problem with the
brake system has been detected. Have your vehicle
serviced by your retailer as soon as possible.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
The brake system warning light will also appear on the
instrument panel cluster when this message appears
page 3-35.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will only display while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
display if there has been a problem detected with
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and
then back on. If this message still stays on or turns back
on again while you are driving, your vehicle needs
service. Have the StabiliTrak® System inspected by your
retailer as soon as possible.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
SERVICE PARK LAMPS
This message will display when there is a problem with
the park lamps. Check to see if the park lamp fuse
is blown and replace the fuse if necessary. See Fuses
changing the fuse does not correct the problem, see
your retailer.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message will display when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by your
retailer as soon as possible.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM
If your vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will display when the system is not functioning
properly. A warning light will also appear on the
instrument panel cluster. See Traction Control
Have the traction control system serviced by your
retailer as soon as possible.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
display when StabiliTrak® is actively assisting you with
directional control of the vehicle. Slippery road
conditions may exist when this message is displayed,
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. Press any of the DIC buttons to acknowledge this
message and to clear it from the screen.
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
This message will display only while the ignition is in
RUN. This message stays on until road conditions
change and StabiliTrak® is not active.
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
This message cannot be acknowledged and cleared
from the screen.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITY CONTROL OFF
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak®, this message will
display any time the system turns off. When this
message has been displayed, StabiliTrak® is no longer
available to assist you with directional control of the
If your vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will display when the system is on. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. See Traction
This message only displays while the ignition is in
RUN and will not disappear until driving conditions
change and the traction control is no longer active.
This message will display only while the ignition is
in RUN.
This message cannot be acknowledged or cleared from
the screen.
Any of the following conditions may cause the
StabiliTrak® system to turn off:
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
• The battery is low.
• There is a StabiliTrak® system failure. See your
retailer for service.
If your vehicle has the traction control system, this
message will display when the traction control system
page 4-8 for more information.
This message will only display while the ignition is in
RUN and will disappear after two seconds.
Any of the following conditions may cause the traction
control system to turn off:
• The traction control system is turned off by pressing
the traction control button located on the center of
the instrument panel. See Traction Control
STARTING DISABLED
This message will display if the starting of the engine is
disabled due to the electronic throttle control system
or vehicle theft-deterrent system. Have your vehicle
serviced by your retailer immediately.
This message will only appear while the ignition is in
RUN, and will not disappear until the problem is
resolved.
• The battery is low.
This message cannot be acknowledged.
• There is a traction control system failure. See your
retailer for service.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRANSMISSION FLUID HOT
DIC Vehicle Personalization
(Uplevel Only)
This message will display when the transaxle fluid in
your vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to
idle until it cools down. If the warning message
continues to display, have the vehicle serviced by your
retailer as soon as possible.
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers. The
customization features include the following:
This message will display and a chime will sound only
while the ignition is in RUN. Press any of the DIC
buttons to acknowledge this message and to clear it
from the screen.
• Exterior lighting delay
• Interior lighting delay
• Delayed locking
This message will continue to display for two seconds if
it has not been acknowledged when the engine is
turned off. It will also re-display for two seconds if the
message has been acknowledged, but the condition still
exists when the engine is turned off.
• Content theft
• Remote keyless entry feedback
• Remote start
• Rear park chime
If the condition still exists, the message will re-appear
when the engine is turned on.
Your vehicle may also have personalization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to a
preferred setting for up to two drivers. The first
personalized key corresponds to driver 1 and the second
personalized key corresponds to driver 2. The
personalization features include the following:
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message will display as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than
about 0.75 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn
• Radio station presets
This message displays and a chime sounds only when
the ignition is in RUN. This message will clear from
the screen if the turn signal is manually turned off, a turn
is completed, or the message is acknowledged.
• Auto door unlock preferences
• Remote keyless entry unlock preferences
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All of the customization and personalization options may
not be available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on your DIC.
3. Press the set/reset button to begin.
4. The DIC will then display an instruction screen.
Press the menu button to display the modes that
are available to program.
The default settings for the customization and
personalization features were set when your vehicle left
the factory, but may have been changed from their
default setting since then.
Press the set/reset button to change the setting of
each mode.
Customization Menu Items
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
The driver’s personalization preferences are recalled by
using the key programmed for driver 1 or 2.
FACTORY DEFAULTS
To change customization and personalization
preferences, use the following procedure.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
and personalization features back to their factory default
settings.
Entering the Personal Program Menu
Press the menu button until FACTORY DEFAULTS
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
2. Press the menu button until PERSONAL
PROGRAM displays.
NO (default): The customization and personalization
features will not be set to their factory default settings.
If the vehicle is not in PARK (P), PERSONAL
PROGRAM ONLY IN PARK will display.
If the vehicle is not able to enter the personal
program menu, PERSONAL PROGRAM NOT
AVAILABLE will display.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
YES: The customization and personalization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHT DELAY
This feature allows you to set the amount of time the
exterior lamps remain on after the key is removed from
the ignition or the vehicle is unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
If YES is selected, the keys will need to be personalized
again to be recognized as key 1 or 2. See
“PERSONALIZE KEY” later in this section for more
information.
Press the menu button until EXT LIGHT DELAY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
ALL KEYS RESET
15 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
15 seconds.
This screen will only display if YES was selected on the
FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
30 seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
Press the set/reset button to scroll through the following
choices:
60 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
60 seconds.
CANCEL (default): The features will not be set to their
factory default settings and the DIC will return to the
FACTORY DEFAULTS screen.
90 seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
90 seconds.
OK: The features will be set to their factory default
settings, the DIC will exit the personal program menu,
and PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED will display.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INT (Interior) LIGHTS KEYS REMOVED
DELAYED LOCKING
This feature enables the interior lamps in the vehicle to
turn on for about 25 seconds after the key is removed
from the ignition.
This feature allows the locking of the vehicle to be
delayed until all of the doors have been closed
for approximately five seconds.
Press the menu button until INT LIGHTS KEYS
REMOVED appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button to scroll through the following choices:
When the delayed locking feature is enabled, it may be
activated when the key is out of the ignition by doing
one of the following:
• Pressing the driver’s door power lock switch
one time while the driver’s door is open.
OFF: Removing the key from the ignition will not
cause the interior lamps to turn on.
• Pressing the passenger’s door power lock switch
one time while the passenger’s door is open.
ON (default): Removing the key from the ignition will
cause the interior lamps to be turned on for about
25 seconds.
• Pressing the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter one time while any door is open.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
Two chimes will sound to signal that delayed locking is
active.
The doors may be locked immediately by repeating
one of the above actions more than one time.
If a door remains open, without any other door being
opened or closed, the vehicle will lock after
approximately 45 seconds.
If a key is in the ignition, this feature will not lock the
information.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the menu button until DELAYED LOCKING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
ON (default): The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned on.
When ON is selected, the content theft-deterrent system
will be armed when the vehicle is locked by pressing
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
or by pressing the power door lock switch. See
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the
vehicle’s doors.
ON (default): The locking of the vehicle’s doors will be
delayed by five seconds while a door is open after a
power door lock switch is pressed, or the lock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed while
a door is open.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
CONTENT THEFT
If your vehicle has the content theft-deterrent system,
once this feature is turned on, the system will activate if
someone tries to enter the vehicle without using the
remote keyless entry transmitter or the correct key. It will
also activate when an incorrect key is used in the
ignition.
Press the menu button until FOB LOCK FEEDBACK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following choices:
OFF: There will be no feedback when locking the
vehicle.
Press the menu button until CONTENT THEFT appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following choices:
LIGHTS: The exterior lamps will flash when you press
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
OFF: The content theft-deterrent system will be
turned off.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHTS and HORN (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter, and the horn will sound when
the lock button is pressed again within five seconds
of the previous command.
REAR PARK CHIME
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this feature allows the URPA system’s
chime to be turned OFF or ON. See Ultrasonic Rear
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
Press the option button until REAR PARK CHIME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
REMOTE START
OFF: The URPA system’s chime will be disabled.
If your vehicle has remote start, this feature allows the
remote start to be turned OFF or ON. The remote
start feature allows you to start the engine from outside
of the vehicle using the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” under Remote
more information.
ON (default): The URPA system’s chime will be
enabled.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
Press the menu button until REMOTE START appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button to
scroll through the following choices:
Personalization Menu Items
The following are personalization features that allow you
to program setting for up to two drivers:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
PERSONALIZE KEY
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
If you are using a key that has already been
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
personalized to be recognized as key 1 or 2, this screen
will not display. This feature allows you to personalize
a key to be recognized as key 1 or 2. A personalized key
allows you to program personalization features to a
preferred setting to correspond to key 1 or 2.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the menu button until PERSONALIZE KEY
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
RADIO STATIONS PERSONALIZED
This screen displays only if YES was selected for the
PERSONALIZE KEY feature. This feature allows you to
set the radio station presets to be recognized for the
key, 1 or 2, that is being used. Once this message
displays, set the radio station presets. If the presets are
not set at this time, the presets will not be recognized
for key 1 or 2, however, the vehicle radio station presets
will be maintained.
NO (default): The key will not be personalized.
YES: The key will be personalized.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REPLACE KEY
This feature allows automatic door unlocking to be
turned off, used for the driver’s door only, or for all of
the doors.
This screen displays only if YES was selected for the
PERSONALIZE KEY feature, keys 1 and 2 have already
been personalized, and the current key being used is
not key 1 or 2. This feature allows you to program a key
to be recognized as key 1 or 2 in the event that the
previously programmed key needs to be replaced.
Press the menu button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
1: The key will be programmed to be recognized as
key 1.
OFF: None of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is
shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of the
ignition.
2: The key will be programmed to be recognized as
key 2.
DRIVER: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out of
the ignition.
CANCEL (default): The key will not be programmed.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALL (default): All of the doors will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) or the key is taken out
of the ignition.
FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST PRESS
This feature allows the selection of which doors will
unlock on the first press of the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter. See Remote
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
Press the menu button until FOB UNLOCK ON 1ST
PRESS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button to scroll through the following choices:
AUTO UNLOCK ON
This feature displays only if DRIVER or ALL was
selected for the AUTO DOOR UNLOCK feature. This
feature allows the selection of when the vehicle’s doors
will unlock.
DRIVER (default): The driver’s door will unlock on the
first press of the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
Press the menu button until AUTO UNLOCK ON
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
to scroll through the following choices:
ALL: All of the doors will unlock on the first press of
the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
KEY-OUT: The door(s) will unlock when the key is
taken out of the ignition.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it.
The DIC will then display PRESS UNLOCK SWITCH
ON KEY FOB. Press the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter and your setting will be
saved for that remote keyless entry transmitter.
PARK (default): The door(s) will unlock when the
vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press the
menu button while it is displayed on the DIC to select it
and move on to the next feature.
After programming the last option, the message KEY
FOB NOW PERSONALIZED will appear on the
DIC display for a few seconds if you personalized the
key. Next, the message PERSONAL OPTIONS SAVED
will appear briefly on the DIC display, then the display
will return to the PERSONAL PROGRAM main screen.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Exiting the Personal Program Menu
The personal program menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in RUN.
• The end of the personal program menu is reached.
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time
Press the H or the M button to enter clock mode. Press
and hold H until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold M until the correct minute
appears on the display.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your retailer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour, press either the H or the M button to enter the
clock mode, then press the tune knob to select
between the 12 or 24 hour display format. The clock
mode will automatically time out with the changed
display format set as the current default setting.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Radio with CD
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc
CD similar
Your vehicle has seven Bose® amplified speakers.
See your retailer for details.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the default on the display, press the
information button until you see the display you want,
then hold the button for two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep and the selected display will now be
the default.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
If your vehicle has XM™, XM™ is a satellite radio
service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States.
XM™ offers 100 coast-to-coast channels including
music, news, sports, talk, and children’s programming.
XM™ provides digital quality audio and text information
that includes song title and artist name. A service
fee is required in order to receive the XM™ service. For
more information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com
or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
AUTO n (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive, by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select AUTO VOLUME MIN, AUTO VOLUME MED,
or AUTO VOLUME MAX. Each higher setting will
provide more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. To turn automatic volume off, press this button
until AUTO VOLUME OFF appears on the display.
Playing the Radio
Top Knob (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn
the system on and off. Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, it includes
Bose® AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the
audio system to compensate for background noise,
so that your music always sounds the same at the set
volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio
volume settings where background noise can affect
how well you hear the music being played through your
vehicle’s audio system. At higher volume settings,
where the music is much louder than the background
noise, there may be little or no adjustments by
AudioPilot®.
4 (Information): For RDS, press this button to change
what appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY, and the name of the program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the information
button while in XM™ mode to retrieve four different
categories of information related to the current song or
channel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use AudioPilot®, set the radio volume to your
desired level. Turn AudioPilot® on by pressing the
automatic volume button until AVOL ON appears on the
display. As you increase vehicle speed, the background
noise in your vehicle will increase. AudioPilot® will
adjust your audio system’s output for the background
noise it hears. To turn AudioPilot® off, press the
automatic volume button until AVOL OFF appears on
the display. For additional information on AudioPilot®,
please visit www.bose.com.
t SCAN u: Press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on the
display. The radio will go to a station, play for a
few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
four seconds until PRESET SCAN appears on the
display. The radio will go to the next preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either scan arrow again or one of the
pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press
this button again to turn the sound on.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
This button is not available on the Radio with
Six-Disc CD.
Setting Preset Stations
Finding a Station
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
1. Turn the radio on.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio
stations.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
t SEEK u: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are EQ1 through EQ7 and
CUSTOM.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
e (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press this knob until
BALANCE appears on the display. Turn the knob
to move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
e (Bass/Treble/Midrange): Press this knob to select
BASS, MIDRANGE, or TREBLE. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press this knob until FADE appears on the
display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the middle
position, press and hold this knob when the tone
control is on the display. The level will change to the
middle position.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
press and hold this knob when the speaker control is on
the display. The level will change to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold this knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS
CENTERED will appear on the display.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, press and hold this knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. AUDIO SETTINGS
CENTERED will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a category by
performing the following:
Finding a Category Station
(RDS and XM™)
1. Press the CAT button. The last selected category
will appear on the display.
To select and find a desired category perform the
following:
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
1. Press the CAT button. The last selected category
will appear on the display.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and
hold either SCAN arrow until you hear a beep and
SCAN CATEGORY appears on the display.
The radio will begin scanning the stations in the
category.
2. Turn the tune knob to select the category.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to take you to a category’s station.
SEEKING CATEGORY will appear on the display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop scanning.
4. To go to another station within that category, press
the CAT button to display the category, then press
either SEEK arrow to go to another station.
If both category and TRAF are on, the radio will scan
for stations with the selected category and traffic
announcements.
If both category and traffic are on, the radio will search
for stations with the selected category and traffic
announcements.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same category. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
If the radio cannot find the desired category, NONE will
appear on the display and the radio will return to the
last station you were listening to.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can view the last message until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TA appears on the display, the tuned
station broadcasts traffic announcements and when a
traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio
station you will hear it.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
If the station does not broadcast traffic announcements,
press the TRAF button and the radio will seek to a
station that does. When a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements is found, the radio will stop seeking
and TA will appear on the display. If no station is found
that broadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC
will appear on the display.
4 (Information): If the current station has a message,
INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If TA is on the display, press the TRAF button to turn off
the traffic announcements.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release this button. A
new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, INFO will disappear from the
display until another new message is received. The last
message can be displayed by pressing this button.
The radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. The radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
This function does not apply to XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your retailer for service.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your vehicle and
must be returned to your retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Locked
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously
been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™
receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this
message is received after having your vehicle serviced,
check with your retailer.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your retailer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your retailer.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, CD and the CD symbol
will appear on the display. As each new track starts to
play the track number will appear on the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you add paper labels to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to
play scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage
the CD player. When using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without paper labels,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press
this button again to turn the sound on.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the start of the
next track. If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving backward or
forward through the CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next or
previous track.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. CD will appear on the display
when a CD is in the player. If the system has a remote
playback device, pressing this button a second time
will allow the remote device to play.
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse
the current track.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to fast
forward through the current track.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential, order. RANDOM
DISC will appear on the display. Press this button again
to turn off random play.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track over
again. REPEAT will appear on the display. Press
this button again to turn off repeat play.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject the CD. EJECT
may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
M (Load): Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number will appear on the display.
2. Press and release the load button.
3. When INSET CD # appears on the display, load a
CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
2. Press and hold the load button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and LOAD ALL DISC will
appear on the display.
3. When INSERT CD # appears on the display, load a
CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Once the CD is loaded, wait for INSERT CD # to
appear on the display, then load the next CD.
The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to
load more than six.
Notice: If you add paper labels to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without paper labels, load one CD
at a time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the load button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
2. When REMOVE DISC appears on the display, the
CD will eject and can be removed.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the load or the
eject button.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25 second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.
Do not repeatedly press the eject button to eject a CD
after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
X (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next or
previous track.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
{ (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse
1. Press and hold the eject button for two seconds.
within the current track.
You will hear a beep and EJECT ALL DISCS will
appear on the display.
| (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to fast
forward through the current track.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential order, on one CD or
all of the loaded CDs.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release this button until
RANDOM DISC PLAY appears on the display.
t SCAN u: To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and release this button until
RANDOM ALL DISCS appears on the display.
To turn off random play, press and release the RDM
button until RANDOM OFF appears on the display.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again, to
stop scanning.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track or an
entire CD over again.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release this button
until REPEAT appears on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• To repeat an entire CD, press and release this
button until REPEAT ONE DISC appears on
the display.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. CD will appear on the display
when a CD is in the player. If your system is equipped
with a remote playback device, pressing this button
a second time will allow the remote device to play.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the RPT
button until REPEAT OFF appears on the display.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
that was recorded using no file folders. The system can
support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the
depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback. If a CD contains more
than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum will be ignored.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps,
128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps,
and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist
name, and album will be available when recorded using
ID3 tags versions 1 and 2.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a
large number of files and folders or playlists may
cause the player to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders,
playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See the information button later in this section for
more information. The new track name will appear on
the display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a CD
that was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
File System and Naming
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
The song name that will be displayed will be the
song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the
song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the
radio will display the file name without the extension
(such as .mp3) as the track name.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first playlist.
Preprogrammed Playlists
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• If the CD does not contain any playlists, then play
will begin from the first track under the root directory.
When all tracks from the root directory have been
played, play will continue from files according to their
numerical listing. After playing the last track from the
last folder, play will begin again at the first track of
the first folder or root directory.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you add paper labels to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to
play scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage
the CD player. When using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition without paper labels,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in, and READING will appear on
the display. The CD should begin playing and the CD
symbol will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD will start to play where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
O / e (Tune): Turn this knob to go to the next or
previous track.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
{ (Previous Folder): Press this button to go to the
first track in the previous folder. Press and hold this
button to reverse through the current track.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
| (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
first track in the next folder. Press and hold this button to
fast forward the current track.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): Press this button to hear the tracks in
random, rather than sequential order, on one CD,
one folder, or all of the loaded CDs.
• To repeat a folder, press and release this button
until REPEAT FOLDER appears on the display.
To turn off repeated play, press and release the RPT
button until REPEAT OFF appears on the display.
To use random, do one of the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release this button until
RANDOM DISC appears on the display.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again to turn the sound on.
This button is not available on the Radio with
Six-Disc CD.
• To play the tracks in the folder you are listening to
in random order, press and release this button
until RANDOM FOLDER appears on the display.
t SEEK u: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than 10 seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If
either arrow is held or pressed more than once, the
player will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and release this button until
RANDOM ALL appears on the display.
To turn off random play, press and release the RDM
button until RANDOM OFF appears on the display.
4 (Information): Press this button to display the artist
name and album contained in the ID3 tag.
RPT (Repeat): Press this button to hear a track, CD, or
a folder over again.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
To use repeat, do one of the following:
• To repeat a track, press and release this button
until REPEAT TRACK appears on the display.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
• To repeat a CD, press and release this button until
REPEAT DISC appears on the display.
Y (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK arrows.
Seeking past the last saved track will return to the
first saved track.
Using R (Song List) Mode (Single CD,
MP3, and Six-Disc CD)
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least
one CD.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
2. Check to see that the CD player is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display. If
S-LIST is present, press the song list button to
turn it off.
3. Press either SEEK arrow or turn the tune knob to
select the desired track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the song list button for two seconds.
Release the button when SONG REMOVED
appears on the display.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK right arrow or
turn the tune knob to locate the track to be
saved. The track will begin to play.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
4. Press and hold the song list button to save the
track into memory. When song list is pressed,
one beep will be heard immediately. ADDED SONG
will appear on the display.
To delete the entire song list, perform the
following steps:
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
1. Turn the CD player on.
SONGLIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to
save more than 20 selections.
2. Press the song list button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press the song list button. The
recorded tracks will begin to play in the order they
were saved.
3. Press and hold the song list button for more than
four seconds. One beep will be heard. SONGLIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
To end song list mode, press the song list button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed
from the display.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD Messages
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your retailer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to your
retailer when reporting the problem.
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system includes
a DVD player, a video display screen, auxiliary inputs,
two sets of wireless headphones, and a remote control.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning on the parental control will also disable all other
button operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA, DVD
player, and remote control.
Parental Control
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
on and a disc is in the player. If no disc is in the
player, the system will power up in auxiliary mode.
Before You Drive
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so. The RSE
system will play DVD, CD, and MP3 discs. You can also
connect an auxiliary device to the RSE system to play
games, watch videos, look at pictures, etc.
rj (Parental Control): This button is located behind
the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks. Press this
button while using RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playing
to blank the video screen and to mute the audio. The
power indicator lights on the DVD player will flash.
Normal operation may be limited under extremely low or
high temperatures, in order to protect the system
from damage. Operate the RSE system under normal or
comfortable cabin temperature ranges.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Headphones
Wireless Headphones
The RSE system may include two sets of wireless
headphones (batteries are not included).
If there is a decreased audio signal during CD, MP3, or
DVD play, there may be a low hissing noise through
the speakers and/or headphones. If the hissing sound in
the wireless headphones seems excessive, make
sure that the headphone batteries are fully charged.
Some amount of hissing is normal.
The wireless headphones have an ON/OFF switch, a
channel select switch, and a volume control. To use the
headphones, turn the switch to ON. An indicator light
on the headphones will illuminate. If the light does
not illuminate, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Switch the headphones to OFF when not
in use.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
The headphones will shut off automatically to save the
battery power if the RSE system is shut off or if the
headphones are out of range of the transmitters for more
than three minutes. The transmitters are located next
to the DVD faceplate. If you move too far forward or step
out of the vehicle, the headphones will lose the audio
signal.
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly using the
diagram on the inside of the battery compartment.
3. Tighten the screw on the battery compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries, and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
DVD and auxiliary audio will always be found on
channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless headphones.
RSA audio is dedicated to CHB or CH2 of the wireless
headphones.
To adjust the volume on the wireless headphones, use
the volume control.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wired Headphones
Stereo RCA Jacks
There is a right and left wired headphone jack. To
adjust the volume, do the following:
1. Plug the headphone into the corresponding jack,
located behind the video screen, next to the
auxiliary jacks.
2. Press the corresponding headphone button on the
DVD faceplate.
3. Press the right and left arrow buttons, on the DVD
faceplate, to increase or to decrease the volume.
The wired headphones work as follows:
• DVD on / RSA off: The wired headphones will play
RSE audio.
• DVD off / RSA on: The wired headphones will play
RSA audio.
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen on
the DVD console. The RCA jacks allow audio and
video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit to the
RSE. The yellow RCA jack is used for video inputs, the
red RCA jack for right audio inputs, and the white
RCA jack for left audio inputs. The system requires
standard RCA cables, not included, to connect the
auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
• DVD on / RSA on: The wired headphones will play
RSA audio.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary audio and video inputs, connect an
external auxiliary device such as a camcorder to the
RCA jacks and turn on both the auxiliary device power
and the power on the front of the RSE player.
Vehicle Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard through the
vehicle’s speakers at a time.
The RSE system or an auxiliary device can be heard
through all of the vehicle’s speakers when the following
occurs:
If a disc is present when the RSE power is turned on,
the player will automatically begin playing the disc
and the user will need to press the AUX button on the
remote control or on the DVD player faceplate to switch
the system between the DVD player and the auxiliary
device. See “DVD Player” and “Remote Control” later in
this section for more information.
• A DVD or auxiliary device is playing
• The front audio system is on and the CD AUX
button is pressed to enable the RSE system
DVD will appear on the radio display when the RSE
system is on.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary devices can be
heard through the following possible sources:
To turn the vehicles speakers on and off, press the CD
AUX button on the radio. The audio from the RSE
system can be heard through the wireless headphones
and the vehicles speakers at the same time. The
volume on the radio may vary when switching between
the radio, CD, DVD, MP3, or an auxiliary device.
• Vehicle Speakers
• Wireless Headphones
• Wired Headphones (not included)
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
DVD Player
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for
more information.
1. Push forward on the release button and the screen
will fold down.
2. Adjust its position as desired.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold. The DVD region code is printed
on the jacket of most DVDs.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
stowed and latched position.
Notice: Directly touching the video screen may
damage it. Do not touch the screen. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for more
information.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, enhanced CDs,
video CDs, and CD-ROM with MP3 media are supported
by this DVD player. DVD+R, DVD+RW, and copy
protected CDs may or may not be supported by the
DVD player. The DVD player does not support
DVD-RAM, DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD-R/W, and DVD
audio media. An error message will appear on the
display if this type of media is inserted into the DVD
player.
If an error message appears on the video screen, see
“DVD Messages” later in this section.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Player Buttons
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary device.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
disc. Press this button while a disc is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue play of a disc.
tr / [ u (Previous and Fast Reverse/Next
and Fast Forward): These controls can be used
to move forward or backward through a disc.
These buttons can also be used to modify RSA, rear
temperature, rear fan speed, and wired headphone
volume adjustment. See “Headphones” earlier in this
more information.
cY (Stop/Eject): Press and release this button to
stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding.
When a DVD is playing in the DVD player and the RSA
system is on, the stop/eject and play/pause buttons
are the only buttons that will work.
Press this button twice to eject a disc. If the player is
already stopped, then only press this button once.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start if
the vehicle is in ACCESSORY, ON, or RAP.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate,
when the disc is stopped, to eject the disc. There is not
an eject button on the remote control.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period
of time.
If a disc is already in the player, make sure that the
DVD player is on, then press the play/pause button on
the player faceplate or on the remote control. You
can also, press the CD AUX button on the radio
faceplate, until RSE appears on the display, to start
playing a disc.
Remote Control
The RSE system will include a remote control (batteries
not included). To use the remote control, aim it at the
transmitter window next to the RSE faceplate and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
may affect the ability of the transmitter to receive signals
from the remote control. If the remote control does
not seem to be working, the batteries may need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section. Objects blocking the line of sight will affect the
function of the remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or previews. Some DVDs
will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the
DVD does not begin playing at the main title, refer to
the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop
button on the DVD player faceplate or the remote
control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Keep
the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected.
If the disc has been ejected, the disc will resume play at
the beginning of the disc.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
n, q, p, o (Directional Arrows): Press these
buttons to move through DVD menus.
The up and down arrows will move through MP3
folders.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Control Button): Press this button to
open the RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) menus
to adjust the color, tint, brightness, contrast, and
display modes.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to view the main
DVD menu. The menu is different on every disc. Use the
up, down, right, and left arrow buttons to move the
cursor around the menu. After making a selection, press
the enter button.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
q (Return): Press this button to go back one step in
the RSE OSD menu and some DVD menus. Press
this button to exit the current menu and to move to the
previous menu.
P (Backlight): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlighting on. The backlight will automatically
turn off after eight seconds.
v (Title): Press this button to display the current title
number. Each press of this button will move the disc
to the next available title.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a disc.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
disc. Press this button while a disc is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue playing the disc.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to display the current
subtitles. Each press of this button will move the
DVD to the next available subtitle option (English,
Spanish, French, etc., if available). The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
t (Prior Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the current chapter or track. Press
this button again to return to the previous chapter
or track. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera): Press this button to display the current
camera angle on DVDs that have this feature. Each
press will move the DVD to the next available camera
angle. The format and content of this function will
vary for each disc.
u (Next Chapter/Track): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button may not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
0 through 9 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD and CD. To stop reversing, press the play
or stop button. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
\ (Clear): Press this button within two seconds after
inputting a numeric selection, to clear all numeric
inputs.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD and CD. To stop fast forwarding, press the play
or stop button. This button may not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
} 10 (Multiple Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than 9. Press
this button before inputting the number.
e (Sound): Press this button to display the current
audio track. Each press will move the DVD to the next
language or commentary. The format and content of
this function will vary for each disc.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RSE On-Screen Display (OSD) Menu
Battery Replacement
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a DVD or an
auxiliary device, do the following:
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the battery door, located on the back of the
remote control, down.
To access this menu, press the display button on the
remote control. Once the menu is on the screen, use the
directional arrows and the enter button to navigate the
screen. This menu will let you select default preferences
for video format, language preference, brightness,
color, contrast, and tint. Not all DVDs support all the
feature defaults in the setup menus. If a feature is not
supported, the defaults will be provided by the DVD
media. To exit this menu, press the display or the return
button on the remote control or wait for the menu to
time out.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Close the battery door.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The default language selection will apply to all
future DVDs.
To use the RSE OSD menu when using a CD or an
MP3, do the following:
Make sure that a CD or an MP3 is loaded in the RSE
system and that the system is not in auxiliary, then press
the display button on the remote control. Once the
menu is on the screen, use the directional arrows and
the enter button to navigate the screen. This menu
will let you select default preferences for language and
playback settings. To exit this menu, press the
display or the return button on the remote control or
wait for the menu to time out.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
Problem
Recommended Action
No sound — Vehicle
Speakers
If the DVD system is
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
being heard through the
vehicle speakers, adjust
the volume on the radio.
Press the CD AUX button
on the radio to make sure
that RSE is enabled. The
rear speakers will mute
when RSA is on.
The ignition may not be
in ACCESSORY, RUN,
or RAP.
Disc will not play.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
pressed. The power
indicator lights will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary source mode.
Press the AUX button to
switch between the DVD
player and the auxiliary
source. The disc is upside
down or is not compatible.
The picture is distorted
during fast forward or
reverse.
This is normal for this
operation.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the top
and bottom or on both
sides or it looks
Video mode may not be
correctly set. See “RSE
OSD” earlier in this
section.
No sound — Wireless
Headphones
Turn the headphones on.
Make sure the correct
channel is selected on the
wireless headphones.
Check the batteries. The
volume on the
stretched out.
I ejected the disc and
tried to take it out, but
it was pulled back into
the slot.
Press the eject
button once.
headphones could be too
low, adjust the volume.
No sound — Wired
Headphones
Make sure the wired
headphones are plugged
in. Adjust the volume. If
RSA is on, DVD audio will
not be heard.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
The language in the audio Press the main menu
or on the screen is wrong. button on the remote
control and change the
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Press and release the
AUX button on the remote
control or the DVD player
to get to auxiliary input.
Check to make sure that
the auxiliary source is
connected to the inputs
properly.
audio or language
selection on the DVD
menu. To change the
language preference,
press the display button to
access the RSE OSD
The audio or video skips
or jumps.
The DVD could be dirty or
scratched. Try cleaning
the disc.
menu. See “RSE OSD”
earlier in this section.
The remote control does
not work.
Point the remote control
directly at the face of the
DVD unit. The batteries
could be weak or put in
wrong. The parental
control button might have
been pressed, the power
indicator lights will flash.
The fast forward, fast
reverse, previous,
and next functions do
not work.
Some commands that do
one thing for DVDs will
not always work or
perform the same function
for audio, audio discs, or
games. These functions
may also be disabled
when the DVD is playing
the copyright information
or the previews. When
RSA is on, these buttons
control RSA functions.
How do I get subtitles on Press the subtitle button
or off?
on the remote control to
select subtitle option or go
to the DVDs main menu
and follow the screen
prompts.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Problem
Recommended Action
Problem
Recommended Action
My disc is stuck in the
player. The eject button
does not work.
Press the eject button on
the DVD player. Turn the
ignition off, then on again,
then press the eject
DVD System inoperable.
In severe or extreme
temperatures the DVD
system might not be
operable. Temperatures
below −4°F (−20°C) or
above 140°F (60°C) could
damage the DVD system.
Operate the DVD system
under normal or
button on the DVD player.
Do not attempt to force or
remove the disc from the
player. If the problem
persists, return to your
retailer for further
comfortable cabin
assistance.
temperature ranges. See
your retailer if the problem
persists.
I lost the remote control
and/or the headphones.
Contact your retailer for
assistance.
The wireless headphones Verify that the
have audio distortion.
Sometimes the wireless
This could be caused by
headphones are facing to
headphone audio cuts out interference from cell
the front of the vehicle,
left and right sides are
indicated on the
or buzzes for a moment,
then it comes back.
towers or by using the
cellular telephone or other
radio transmitter devices
in the vehicle.
headphones to ensure
that the signal is received
properly.
Verify that there is no
obstruction between the
headphone(s) and the
transmitter.
Verify that the batteries
have a full charge.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the signal coming
from the auxiliary device
and make sure that the
connection and the signal
is good.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Messages
DVD Distortion
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen.
There may be an experience with video distortion when
operating cellular phones, scanners, CB radios,
Global Position Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile
fax, or walkie talkies.
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the disc format is not compatible.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
mechanism cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the DVD Player
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
When cleaning the outside DVD faceplate and buttons,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.
No Disc: This message will be displayed when you try
to play or eject a disc that is not in the player.
X: A white X will be displayed, in the upper left corner
of the video screen, if the operation that has been
selected is not currently available.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
If your vehicle has rear seat audio (RSA), this feature
allows rear seat passengers to listen to and control any
of the following audio sources: AM/FM tuner, front
CD player, and XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped). However, the rear seat passengers can
only control the sources that the front seat passengers
are not listening to. For example, rear seat passengers
may listen to a CD in the front radio and control it
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch
the source for the main radio to a remote source,
the RSA will not be able to control the remote source.
You can operate the RSA when the main radio is off.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA system
on or off. RSA CHB or RSA CH2 will appear on the
display when the system is on to indicate the channel to
receive audio for the wireless headphones. Pressing
this button will also silence the rear speakers.
The DVD or auxiliary device will always be available on
channel (CHA or CH1) of the wireless headphones.
All other RSA sources are available on CHB or CH2 of
the wireless headphones, as well as the wired
headphones. If the RSA is off, the wired headphones
will provide DVD or auxiliary device audio. The rear seat
passengers will not be able to listen to XM, on CHB
or CH2, if the front passenger is listening to a DVD or
auxiliary device.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The selected radio
station will appear on the display. If the front passengers
are listening to the radio, the RSA will not switch
between the bands and cannot change the station.
The remote control will not operate any of the RSA
features.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
tr / [ u (Tune): When listening to the radio,
press the right or the left arrow to go to the next or
the previous station and stay there. This function
is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
playing the AM/FM tuner, front CD player, and XM™
Satellite Radio Service (if equipped). If one of the
sources are not loaded, the system will skip over the
source when this button is pressed.
When a CD is playing, press the left arrow to go to the
start of the current track or to the previous track.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track on the CD.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to a CD.
X (Headphone): Press the right or the left headphone
button to enable volume control of the wired headphone
connected to the corresponding jack. Press the right
and left arrow buttons to change the volume.
PROG (Program): Press this button to select the next
preset station stored on the radio. Each press of
this button will take you to the next preset station. This
function is inactive if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
When a CD is playing in the single CD player, press
this button to select the next track. This function
is inactive if the front seat passengers are listening
to a CD.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rj (Parental Control): This button is located behind
the video screen, below the auxiliary jacks. Press this
button while using RSA, or when a DVD or CD is playing
to blank the video screen and to mute the audio. The
power indicator lights on the DVD player will flash.
Turning on the parental control will also disable all other
button operations from the remote control and the
DVD player, except for the eject button. Press this
button again to restore operation of the RSA, DVD
player, and remote control.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the vehicle is
on and a disc is in the player. If no disc is in the
player then the system will power up in auxiliary mode.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on
the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
wt u x (Seek): Press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appears on the
display. The radio will go to a station, play for a few
seconds, then go to the next station. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
The sound will mute while seeking or scanning. The
radio will only seek or scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is playing, press either arrow to go to the
previous or next track, if more than eight seconds have
played. If either arrow is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving backward
or forward through the CD.
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations that are
programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons. The radio
will go to the next preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press this button again to stop
scanning. The radio will only scan preset stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
$ (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, to turn the sound on.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
r (Play): When listening to the radio, press this
button to play a cassette tape or CD.
wu x (Volume): Press the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease the volume.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
that the XM™ satellite antenna is not obstructed.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Chime Level Adjustment
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and
LOUD will appear on the radio display. To change back
to the default or normal setting, press and hold
pushbutton 6 again. The chime level will change from
the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will appear
on the radio display. Removing the radio and not
replacing it with a factory radio or chime module will
disable vehicle chimes.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base located on the hood of
the vehicle. If tightening is required, tighten by hand.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
• Judgment
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive
after drinking. Please do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride
home in a cab; or if you are with a group,
designate a driver who will not drink.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Traction Control
on page 4-9.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
This warning light will
come on to let you know
if there is a problem
with your traction control
system.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System (TCS)
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates if it senses that
one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system
brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
If the SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM message in the
DIC comes on and stays on or comes on while you are
driving, there’s a problem with your traction control
system. Have the traction control system serviced by
your GM dealer as soon as possible.
When this warning message is on, the TRACTION
CONTROL OFF message in the DIC will come on to
remind you that the system will not limit wheel spin.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
The TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will come
on in the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with StabiliTrak® which
combines anti-lock brake, traction and stability
control systems and helps the driver maintain directional
control of the vehicle in most driving conditions.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But you can turn the
traction control system off if you ever need to. You
should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck
in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks to
insure there are no problems. You may hear or feel
the system working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with your vehicle.
To turn the system off,
press the traction control
button located on the
center of the instrument
panel.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the SERVICE
STABILITY SYSTEM message will be displayed on
the Driver information Center (DIC). If the vehicle has
gone through heavy acceleration or braking or multiple
turns during the first two miles of driving after starting
your vehicle, the STABILITY CONTROL OFF message
may appear on the DIC. If this is the case, your
vehicle does not need servicing. You will need to turn
the vehicle off and then restart it to initialize StabiliTrak®.
If either message appears on the DIC, and your
vehicle has not gone through hard acceleration, braking
or multiple turns in the first two miles of driving, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
button, the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message
will go off, but the system will not turn off until there is no
longer a current need to limit wheel spin. The
TRACTION CONTROL OFF message will come on to
remind you the system is off. You can turn the
system back on at any time by pressing the button
again. The traction control system warning message
should go off.
The STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message will
appear on the DIC only when the system is both on and
activated. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue to go
in the direction in which you are steering.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses that
your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a
patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road. When the
system activates, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal. When the STABILITY
CONTROL ACTIVE message is on, you should continue
to steer in the direction you want to go. The system is
designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult
driving situations by making the most of whatever road
conditions will permit. For more information on the
stability messages, see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-43.
If the StabiliTrak® system turns off, the traction control
system warning light will illuminate, and the STABILITY
CONTROL OFF message will appear on the DIC to
warn the driver that StabiliTrak® is no longer available
to assist you with directional control of the vehicle.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle. It will activate and display
the TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message in the
DIC if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while driving an all-wheel-drive
vehicle, or if one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving a
front-wheel-drive vehicle.
If the brake traction-control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction-control will be disabled and the
TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE message will be
displayed. In the limited mode, the traction control
system will only use engine traction-control and is limited
in its ability to provide optimal performance since the
system will not utilize brake traction-control to control
slip on the drive wheels. The system will return to normal
operation after the brakes have cooled. This can take
up to two minutes or longer depending on brake usage.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of the
stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave traction control on, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin to
slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive
the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE message
will appear on the DIC and the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When road conditions allow
you to use cruise again, you may re-engage the cruise
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your retailer for service.
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque may
be reduced to protect AWD system components. If
the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWD usage,
the AWD system will shut itself off to protect the
system from overheating. When the system cools down,
the AWD system will activate itself again automatically;
this cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending
on outside temperature and vehicle use.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose
control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Traction Control
on page 4-9.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re
driving.
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change
signal and move back into the right lane. Remember
that your right outside mirror is convex. The
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther
away from you than it really is.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If your traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled
by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
Driving at Night
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
CAUTION: (Continued)
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on
the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just your
parking lamps — to help make you more visible
to others.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Driving Through Flowing Water
on page 5-52.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
Freeway Driving
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
all levels?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts at
Saturn retailers all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area,
or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have a traction system, it will improve your ability
to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. But
you can turn the traction system off if you ever need to.
You should turn the traction system off if your vehicle
ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See If Your
page 4-30. Even if your vehicle has a traction system,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the
road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn the traction system off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to help
maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See Traction
If you do not have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Your anti-lock braking system (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Even though you have ABS, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If your
vehicle has traction control, you should turn your traction
control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
If you do need to be towed out, see Towing Your
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your vehicle.
With the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and
loading information label shows the number of
occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity
for your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to
the rear edge of the driver’s door.
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your retailer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the Rating
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Consult your retailer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device know as
a “dolly”).
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
page 4-23.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with car carrier equipment.
Dinghy Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, it can be towed with the two rear wheels on the
ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an
all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of its
wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier
equipment.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Level Control
On vehicles equipped with automatic level control, the
rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you load
or unload your vehicle. However, you should still not
exceed the GVWR or the GAWR. See Loading
Dolly Towing
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
with its two rear wheels on the ground. To dolly tow your
vehicle, do the following:
You may hear the compressor operating when you load
or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the system
self-adjusts. This is normal. The compressor should
operate for brief periods of time. If the sound continues
for an extended period of time, your vehicle needs
service.
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
retailer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability,
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
retailer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with your vehicle.
That is the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies, and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. The
trailer also adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
retailer for more information about towing a
trailer with your vehicle.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• You can use THIRD (3) or, as you need to, a lower
gear when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle
in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize heat
buildup and extend the life of your transaxle.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• Weight of the trailer
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Weight of the trailer tongue
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
• Weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle, or other parts could be damaged.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature, and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on
any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
• During the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a
trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum
trailer weight for your vehicle.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Trailer
Weight
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
*GCWR
Two-Wheel-Drive (Short Wheel Base)
Two-Wheel-Drive (Long Wheel Base)
All-Wheel Drive
3.29
3.29
3.29
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
3,500 lbs (1 588 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg)
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversion. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
You can ask your retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Center, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
more information about your vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
(350 lbs (159 kg)), for your vehicle.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do, remember to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-40. Dirt and water can, too.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Certification/Tire label at the rear edge of the driver’s
Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your
vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
Trailer Brakes
• If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg), be sure to use
a properly mounted weight-carrying hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment is
very important for proper vehicle loading and
good handling when you are driving.
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install, adjust,
and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you
pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires, and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum air
because it only recirculates the air inside
your vehicle. See Climate Control System
on page 3-24.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a
good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you are about to turn, change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Grades
Parking on Hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 lbs (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or, as you
need to, a lower gear. This will minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, do the
following:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you do the following:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for
more on this. Things that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid, engine oil,
belts, cooling system, and brake system. Each of
these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help
you find them quickly. If you are trailering, it is a
good idea to review these sections before you start
your trip.
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle has a trailer wiring harness located at the
rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring harness,
you need a converter kit. Contact your retailer for more
information.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Your Saturn retailer knows your vehicle best and wants
you to be happy with it. We hope you will go to your
retailer for all your service needs. You will get genuine
Saturn parts and Saturn-trained and supported
service people.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle
all Saturn.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-9.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your retailer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of Automobile
Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
page 3-38. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Saturn retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your retailer has additives that will
help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
does not recommend the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
Saturn retailer for service.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual
sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will only
open partway.
While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
page 3-49 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-38.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Lift the hood.
Hood Release
4. Pull up on the hood prop to release it from its
storage clip.
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the hood release
The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine
temperatures under the hood, so be careful when
handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when
handling the hood prop.
handle with this
symbol on it. It is
located under
the instrument panel
on the driver’s side.
5. Put the end of the hood prop into the slot in the
underside of the hood, on the driver’s side of the
vehicle. It is marked by an arrow.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood
prop. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood
and return the prop to its retainer. Then let the hood
down and close it firmly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push the
underhood release to the right. It is located near the
center of the hood, above the grille.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
on page 5-100.
Checking Engine Oil
page 5-40.
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
on page 5-25.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
H. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transaxle Fluid
on page 5-19.
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-28.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
When to Add Engine Oil
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter
of oil. But you must use the right kind. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-103.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range in the cross-hatched area.
Push the dipstick all the way back in when you are
through.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message will come
Change your oil as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your retailer has trained people who
will perform this work using genuine Saturn parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol meet GM Standard GM6094M
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your retailer, a service station, or a local recycling center
for help.
1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off,
repeatedly push the set/reset button until OIL is
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold the set/reset
button for five seconds. The number will disappear
and be replaced by 100 (indicating 100% oil life
remaining).
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required.
To inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct.
2. Remove the duct.
3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the panel
with the slots at the bottom of the housing.
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the
panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated
correctly in the slots.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
{CAUTION:
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transaxle Fluid
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
How to Check Automatic Transaxle
Fluid
• When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
• At high speed for quite a while.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your retailer’s service
department.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if you check the
transaxle fluid.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may have to
drive longer.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds, and
then pull it back out again.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or
paper towel.
The automatic transaxle dipstick is located toward
the back of the engine compartment, next to
the brake master cylinder reservoir. The dipstick
handle is a red loop. See Engine Compartment
on location.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Recommended
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-25.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at the
dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning messages and gages work as they
should.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
What Engine Coolant to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Checking Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be
careful not to spill it.
The coolant recovery tank
is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle,
above the engine air
cleaner/filter. See Engine
on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the full cold
mark, or a little higher. When your engine is warm,
the level should be above the full cold mark or a little
higher. The full cold mark is a line with an arrow
pointing down at it, located on the front of the coolant
recovery tank.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radiator Pressure Cap
{CAUTION:
Notice: The radiator cap on your vehicle is a
pressure-type cap and must be tightly installed to
prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
more information on location.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator. For
information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE COOLANT
HOT message displayed in the Driver Information
page 3-49.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
to a safe place in an emergency.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended
miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat
protection mode should be avoided.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-13.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three
minutes while you are parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
{CAUTION:
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The
vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
The coolant level should be at or above the full cold
mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure
cap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap
B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-27 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, but the coolant
level is not at or above the full cold mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or
above the full cold mark, start your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressure cap.
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. Do not press down while turning the
pressure cap.
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close
the valves after the radiator is filled.
Housing
Bypass Tube
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
and the compartment.
3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed
valves.
There are two bleed valves. One is located on the
thermostat housing. The other is located on the
thermostat bypass tube.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the full
cold mark.
10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler
neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows
on the pressure cap line up with the vent tube.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should
be at the H (Hot) mark. When it is cold, the level should
be at the C (Cold) mark. If the fluid is at the ADD
mark, you should add fluid.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What Power Steering Fluid to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What Washer Fluid to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{CAUTION:
reservoir.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes will not work
well, or will not work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or
they may not even work at all. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper
brake fluid.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to Saturn torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your retailer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality Saturn
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved Saturn replacement parts. If you
do not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are
wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in
the wrong replacement brake parts.
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or
more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it
safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding
door, a low-voltage battery or replacing a battery
may cause the system to become inoperative. See
information.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
The terminal is located
under a tethered cap at
the front of the underhood
fuse block. See Engine
page 5-12 for more
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
information on location.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
Squeeze the tabs and swing the cap out of the way
to access the remote positive (+) terminal. You
should always use the remote positive (+) terminal
instead of the positive (+) terminal on your
battery.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump
starting terminal for that purpose.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
the negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal
on the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
All-wheel-drive vehicles have two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you will need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the differential, you will need to add
some lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole. A fluid loss could
indicate a problem; check and have it repaired, if
needed.
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps
Bulb Replacement
page 5-50.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
A. High-beam Headlamp
B. Low-beam Headlamp
C. Sidemarker Lamp
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
3. Remove the screw (B) from the top of the headlamp
assembly.
for more information.
4. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the socket wiring harness connector
from the headlamp assembly.
6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the assembly.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, disconnect the bulb
socket wiring harness and connect to the new bulb
socket.
To replace a sidemarker bulb, pull the old bulb out
and push a new bulb in.
8. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into the bulb
assembly and turning it clockwise to secure.
9. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
2. Remove the headlamp retainer pin (A) by turning it
towards the headlamp assembly and pulling it
straight out.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Turn Signal, Parking and
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To change a stoplamp/taillamp, turn signal or back-up
lamp bulb, do the following:
more information.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
taillamp housing on the
inboard side.
To replace one of these bulbs (A), do the following:
1. Follow the Steps 1 through 4 to remove the
headlamp assembly. See Headlamps and
information.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove
from the assembly.
3. Pull the old bulb out from the bulb socket.
4. Replace with a new bulb
5. Reinstall the bulb socket by inserting into the bulb
assembly and turning it clockwise to secure.
3. Pull out the taillamp housing.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the
taillamp assembly.
6. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove.
6. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb out of
the socket and gently pushing in a new bulb.
7. Replace the bulb socket by inserting and turning
clockwise to secure.
8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the
outboard locating/retaining pins until the lamp is
seated.
9. Secure with the inboard screws.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Back-up
3057K
Front Turn Signal, DRL and
Parking
5702KA
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp Bulb
High-Beam and Low-Beam
Headlamps
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal
H11
194
3057K
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
retailer.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-14.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
1. Lift the wiper arm and turn the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Squeeze the tabs (B) on each side of the wiper
blade assembly to remove the wiper arm (A)
from the blade (C).
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage
the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not allow the
wiper blade arm to touch the windshield.
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the tabs on each side of the
wiper blade assembly click into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps
listed above.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
{CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Saturn Warranty booklet for details. For
additional information refer to the tire manufacturer’s
booklet included with your vehicle’s Owner Manual.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all
tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
page 5-58.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Compact Spare Tire Example
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door latch. This label shows your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold. The recommended
cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the
minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
page 5-87.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-64 for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Re-check the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
When It Is Time for New Tires
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-69.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
{CAUTION:
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
page 4-31, for examples of the labels and where they
can be found on your vehicle.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your retailer for proper
diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Replacement
{CAUTION:
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Your retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
your vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This symbol is on the
accessory inflator switch.
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an accessory inflator. With it,
you can inflate things like air mattresses and
basketballs, and you can also use it to bring your tires
up to the proper pressure.
The accessory inflator is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side. To access the
accessory inflator, do the following:
more information.
2. Lift the lever to move the third row rear seatback
more information.
There may be an accessory inflator kit stored in the rear
compartment on the passenger’s side. It includes a
20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure gage and nozzle
adapters.
3. Remove the cover by pulling the lever up.
{CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use your accessory inflator system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Notice: If you run the accessory inflator longer
than 30 minutes at a time, you could damage
the inflator. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Run the inflator for short periods of
time only.
2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required,
to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage.
After running the accessory inflator for 30 minutes, wait
at least 10 minutes before restarting the accessory
inflator.
3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet.
5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
To turn off the inflator, do the following:
1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the
inflated object, then from the outlet.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light in the
switch will come on to show the system is working.
2. Put the protective cap back on.
If the accessory inflator system does not turn on or the
light does not come on, the fuse may be blown or
page 5-98 or see your retailer for service.
3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in
the rear compartment on the passenger’s side.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the bottom
of the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab to
secure the cover.
Your accessory inflator will automatically shut off after
about 10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After
about one minute you can use the system again.
Press the switch and the indicator light will come on.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your vehicle’s
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire, on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information will tell you next how to use
the jack and change a tire.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the tools, do the following:
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
more information.
2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped.
3. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting the
tab and pulling the cover off.
The tools you will need are located in the storage
compartment at the rear of the vehicle, on the
passenger’s side.
A. Jack
B. Strap
C. Bracket
D. Wing Nut
E. Bag and Tools
F. Tire Bag and Cable
Storage for
All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Remove the jack (A) and jacking tools (E) by
loosening and then removing the wing nut (D)
and bracket (C).
To remove the compact spare tire, do the following:
5. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and
remove the jacking tools, including the folding
wrench and extension, from the pouch.
A. Hoist Shaft
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Retainer
E. Extension
(Chisel End)
F. Folding Wrench
D. Compact
Spare Tire
1. Attach the folding wrench (F) to the extension (E)
and insert the chisel end on an angle through the
hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft (A).
The tools you will be using include the jack (A),
extension (B), and folding wrench (C).
The compact spare tire is located under the rear of the
more information about the compact spare.
2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower
the compact spare tire (D) to the ground. Continue
to turn the wrench so the compact spare tire
can be pulled out from under the vehicle.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the hoist is
used to store a full-size or a flat road tire under
the vehicle. See “Storing the Flat Tire on an
Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” under Storing a Flat or
information.
4. Remove the compact spare tire from the cable.
If the compact spare tire will not lower, check under the
vehicle to see if the tire is hanging loose and the
cable end and spring under the wheel plate are missing.
If so, the secondary latch system is engaged. See
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
3. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable to remove
the compact spare tire, so it can be pulled up
through the wheel opening.
If your vehicle is an AWD vehicle, after removing
the compact spare tire, turn the wrench clockwise to
raise the cable back up. On an AWD vehicle, you
can not store a full-size tire under the vehicle.
It should be stowed inside the vehicle by the cable
provided. See “Storing the Flat Tire on an
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” under Storing a Flat or
information.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the center cap and/or wheel cover are removed,
use the following steps to remove the flat tire and install
the spare tire.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Loosen the wheel nuts
using the folding
If the wheel has a center cap, use the handle of the
folding wrench to pry it off. Then, with the other end of
the folding wrench, loosen the nuts.
wrench, but do not
remove them.
Turn the handle
counterclockwise about
180 degrees, then
flip the handle back to
the starting position.
This avoids taking
the wrench off the lug
nut for each turn.
If your vehicle has the plastic bolt-on wheel covers,
loosen the bolts completely using the folding wrench,
and remove the wheel cover.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and you
use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts, you
could damage the lock nut or wheel lock key. Do
not use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts
if your vehicle has wheel locks.
Notice: If you use a jack to raise the vehicle
without positioning it correctly, you could damage
your vehicle. When raising your vehicle on a
jack, avoid contact with the rear axle control arms.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
A. Front Location
B. Rear Location
2. Near each wheel, there is a notch (A and B) in the
vehicle’s frame, inboard of the rocker molding.
Position the jack and raise the jack head until it fits
firmly into the notch in the vehicle’s frame nearest
the flat tire.
3. Do not raise the vehicle yet.
4. Put the compact spare tire near you.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
5. Attach the folding wrench (A) to the jack (B), and
turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack head
approximately 3 inches (7.6 cm).
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench
clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the compact spare tire to fit under the
wheel well.
7. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
9. Install the compact spare tire and put the wheel
nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against the hub.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
10. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel
wrench to the jack and turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
12. Do not try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover
securely in the rear of the vehicle until you have the
flat tire repaired or replaced.
11. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secondary Latch System
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It
is designed to stop a tire from suddenly falling off your
vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged.
For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed
with the valve stem pointing down.
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
Your vehicle uses the underbody tire hoist assembly to
store either the compact spare or a flat road tire.
for instructions on storing the spare or flat tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you or
on either side of you as you pull the jack out
from the spare.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch, do
the following:
4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the compact spare tire is resting on the folding
wrench.
1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the center of the compact spare tire.
5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands and
pull it out from under the vehicle.
2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack
until it lifts the secondary latch device under the
wheel plate.
6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding
wrench and jack.
3. Keep raising the jack until the compact spare tire
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place.
This lets you know that the secondary latch
has released.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Spare Tire
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs to be
stored with the valve stem pointing down. If
the spare tire is stored with the valve stem
pointing upwards, its secondary latch won’t
work properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being
driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of course,
damage to itself as well. Be sure the
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
underbody-mounted spare tire is stored with
its valve stem pointing down.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the spare tire, do the following:
1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem down.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back
of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the
wheel and start to raise the tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
4. When the tire is almost in the stored position, turn
the tire so the valve is towards the rear of the
vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until
you feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is
tight. The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the folding wrench to tighten the cable.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Flat Tire on a
Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
The flat tire is stored the same as the spare tire for
front-wheel-drive vehicles. Refer to “Storing the Spare
Tire” listed previously.
Storing the Flat Tire on an
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
1. Remove the tire storage bag and cable package
from the jack storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back
of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
A. Cable
3. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag and place it
in the rear storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the front of the vehicle.
B. Liftgate Hinges
C. Door Striker
4. Pull the cable through the door striker and the
center of the wheel.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Hook the cable onto
the outside portion of
the liftgate hinges.
7. Make sure the metal
tube is centered at the
striker. Push the
tube towards the front
of the vehicle.
6. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.
8. Close the liftgate and make sure it is latched
properly.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment cover
back on.
Storing the Tools
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs on the right
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the
cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers
until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When
you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire,
reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap.
Hand-tighten them over the wheel nuts, using the folding
wrench.
A. Strap
B. Bag and Tools
C. Jack
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compact Spare Tire
Appearance Care
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
• Benzene
• Naphtha
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
• Paint Thinner
• Turpentine
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
• Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in
a non-uniform manner.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Safety Belts
Washing Your Vehicle
Keep belts clean and dry.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention and durability.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is
to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
approved cleaning products from your retailer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-91.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your Saturn retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads do
not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Aluminum Wheels
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take the vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Tires
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because the surface could be damaged. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and
exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your Saturn retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your Saturn retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your Saturn
retailer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Saturn
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Spot Lifter
Removes dust,
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Odor Eliminator
Finish Enhancer
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box. It
is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On
this label, you will find the following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
fuse in the underhood fuse block. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, be sure to get it fixed.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
The rear washer pump is controlled by a relay located
in the engine compartment, behind the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. The rear wiper motor is protected
by a fuse located in the instrument panel fuse block.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
protect the power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by four internal fuses
in the underhood fuse block. An electrical overload
will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases
to remain off. If this happens, have your headlamp
wiring checked right away.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers,
and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the
underhood fuse block. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the right
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, the instrument
panel fuse block and the underhood fuse block.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse block is located under the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
Your vehicle may not have all of the fuses listed.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Trunk, Door Locks
Fuses
19
Usage
Canister Ventilation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Electronic Level Control
Rear Wiper
20
Park Lamps
21
Power Sliding Door
Blank
Radio Amplifier
Interior Lamps
OnStar®
22
23
Blank
24
Left Power Sliding Door
Right Power Sliding Door
Keyless Entry Module
25
Cluster, Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning
8
Relays
26
Usage
Blank
9
Cruise Switch
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Steering Wheel Illumination
Power Mirror
27
28
29
30
Blank
Park Lamps
Retained Accessory Power
Rear Defog
Fuse Puller
Stoplamp, Turn Lamps
Heated Seats
PLR
Blank
Electronic Level Control
Heated Mirror
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp,
Back-up Lamps
31
32
Power Seats
Power Window
17
18
Blank
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment. For more information on location see Engine
Your vehicle may not have all the fuses listed.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Right High Beam
Fuses
13
Usage
Anti-lock Brake System
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Electronic Ignition
1
2
Fuel Pump
Diode
14
3
15
SPARE
Spare
16
Fuel Injector
SPARE
Spare
Climate Control, RPA, Cruise
Control
17
4
Left High Beam
Spare
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Electronic Throttle Control
Engine Sensor, Evaporator
Airbag
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
SPARE
Spare
Not Used
5
6
7
8
Not Used
Air Conditioning Clutch
Horn
Emission, All-Wheel Drive
Auxiliary Power
Front Windshield Washer
AC/DC Inverter
Left Low Beam
Powertrain Control Module,
Electronic Throttle Control
9
Rear Blower
10
11
12
Not Used
Front Blower
Transmission Solenoid
Right Low Beam
Front Windshield Wiper
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
PLR
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Fuse Puller
Fan 1
RUN RLY
LO BEAM
Starter
Low Beam
Starter Solenoid
Anti-lock Brake System Motor
Blank
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
HORN
AC/CLTCH
HI BEAM
PWR/TRN
WPR2
Horn
Air Conditioning Clutch
High Beam
Powertrain
Wiper 2
Fan 2
Front Blower High
Battery Main 3
Rear Defogger
Battery Main 2
Battery Main 1
WPR1
Wiper 1
FAN 1
Fan 1
CRNK
Crank
IGN MAIN
FAN2
Ignition Main
Fan 2
FAN3
Fan 3
BLANK
Not Used
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant Systems
Front A/C
1.7 lbs
2.2 lbs
0.8 kg
1.0 kg
7.0 L
Front and Rear A/C
Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and Replacement
7.4 quarts
AWD Automatic Transaxle — Pan Removal and
Replacement
8.7 quarts
8.3 L
Cooling System
Front A/C
11.3 quarts
12.8 quarts
4.0 quarts
10.7 L
12.2 L
3.8 L
Front and Rear A/C
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Capacity
Regular
20.0 gallons
25.1 gallons
100 ft lb
75.7 L
95.0 L
Extended
Wheel Nut Torque
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
3.5L V6
8
Automatic
0.060 inches (1.52 mm)
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We at Saturn want to help you keep your vehicle in good
working condition. But we do not know exactly how
you will drive it. You may drive very short distances only
a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may
use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your Saturn retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your Saturn retailer for your service
needs, you will know that Saturn-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine Saturn parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
{CAUTION:
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your retailer to have a qualified technician
do the work. See Doing Your Own Service
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine Saturn parts.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your Saturn
retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on, it
means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your Saturn retailer
has Saturn-trained service technicians who will
perform this work using genuine Saturn parts and reset
the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
•
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
Maintenance Footnotes
# Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
shift linkage, and the underbody contact points and
linkage.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor
and release pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding
seats, liftgate hinges, fuel door hinge, power sliding door
cable, and sliding door track(s). More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better, and not stick or squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine
Saturn parts as needed. To help ensure proper
operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and
pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator
and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your Saturn retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
Coolant on page 5-22 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Check the engine coolant level and add
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
{CAUTION:
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Tire Wear Inspection
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
Saturn retailer for service.
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-59.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
on page 2-37.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your Saturn retailer for service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your Saturn retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering Fluid
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from
your retailer.
Windshield
Washer
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Power Steering (Saturn Part No. 21007583 or
System
GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®
oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Automatic
Transaxle
Engine Oil
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474.
Key Lock
Cylinders
page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-22.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
Chassis
Lubrication
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Carrier
Hood and Door
Hinges, Rear
Folding Seat,
Fuel Door
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module) and
Transfer
VERSATRAK® Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378514,
in Canada 88901045).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hinge, Liftgate
Hinges and
Case (Power
Transfer Unit)
Power Sliding
Door Cable
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (Saturn
Part No. 21038869 or GM Part No.
U.S. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Sliding Door
Track
Secondary
Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your Saturn retailer.
Part
Part Number
12565752
25010792
12568387
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
A-2946C
PF47
41-101
Wiper Blades (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side — 22.0 inches (55.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm)
Rear — 16.0 inches (40.0 cm)
15192143
15192144
15192147
—
—
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during and after the purchase of a Saturn
vehicle, for total customer satisfaction. We call this the
Saturn Difference. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be
resolved by your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience falls
below your expectations, we suggest you take
the following action:
• Vehicle Identification Number. This 17-digit number
can be found on the vehicle registration or title, on
the upper driver’s side corner of the dash, or on
your roadside assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
If you wish to write to the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center, our address is:
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
In Canada, write to:
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance,
contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
A Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will
handle your call and assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest retailer location,
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE: Both Saturn and its retailers are
committed to making sure you are completely satisfied
with your Saturn vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its retailers
offer the additional assistance of a neutral party
through our voluntary participation in a
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not
agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
mediation/arbitration program called BBB Auto Line.
Canadian owners refer to your Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information booklet, located in the front cover
pocket of your owner’s handbook, for information on
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using
the toll-free telephone number or by writing them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. This program is available at no cost
to you, our customer.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
We ask that you not resort to BBB Auto Line until after
Saturn and its retailers have been given the opportunity
to satisfy your vehicle concerns. However, U.S.
residents may file a claim at any time by contacting your
local Better Business Bureau at 1-800-955-5100.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
The Owner Center is a resource for your ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer who has
access to a TDD or to a conventional Text
Telephone (TTY) can communicate with Saturn by
dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada may
dial 1-800-263-3830.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit My Saturn within
www.saturn.com (United States) or My GM Canada
within www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000. Text
telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in
Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S. call 1-800-553-6000
(TTY: 1-800-833-6000).
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest Saturn
retailer for warranty service or in the event of
a vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
For vehicles purchased in Canada call 1-800-268-6800.
As the proud owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Saturn’s Roadside
Assistance toll-free number is staffed by courteous and
capable Roadside Assistance Representatives who
are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Saturn Retailer Locator Service
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Saturn’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive Saturn
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number and delivery
date of the vehicle
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember we are only a phone call
away. Saturn Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000;
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
Saturn reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Saturn’s
judgment, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Saturn Corporation.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your retailer or
Saturn Corporation.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
U.S. customers can call the Saturn Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-553-6000, or write:
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263–1999.
Or, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your Saturn
retailer.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins
Service Manuals
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
For additional publications information or to order
publications, call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order on-line.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
Owner Publications
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
win.wallace.com/saturn to order online.
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
less than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of
individual bulletins are also at your participating Saturn
retailer. You can ask to see them.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-72
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving (cont.)
D
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System ....................................... 3-15
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps (cont.)
G
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-30
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-30
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-26
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-29
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
RCA Microwave Oven RMW743 User Guide
Rheem Furnace 05EAUER User Guide
Roberts Gorden Saw 60007 User Guide
Rogue Audio Stereo Amplifier TEMPEST II User Guide
Rotel Stereo Amplifier RB 991 User Guide
Russell Hobbs Microwave Oven RHM1712 User Guide
Samsung Cell Phone SPH M800 User Guide
Samsung Refrigerator RB194AB User Guide
Samsung Stereo System DS660T User Guide
Sanyo Heat Pump 24THS32 User Guide